JP2017136233A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance amusement of games in a game machine.SOLUTION: It is so configured that control means (a presentation control device 300) which performs a presentation of a variable display game by controlling display means (a display device 41) has a function to execute a presentation display where presentation information (a character such as a Tiger Boy C7, a Tiger Rock C8, etc.) that is not identification information (a number such as from "1" to "9") of the variable display game is displayed in a screen 41a of the display means, and to change a mode (a light emission state, an operation state, an operation position, etc.) of an accessory (such as a movable accessory 700 or an accessory 801 that can emit light) in linkage with a display mode (a mode such as whether in a mode with a predetermined item or not, and the like) of the presentation information in the presentation display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 165

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine having a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information and capable of generating a state advantageous to a player according to the result of the variable display game. Are known.
In this type of gaming machine, for example, as described in Patent Document 1, various effects including a notice indicating the result of the variable display game, etc. are displayed as the display device or the like as an effect at the time of the variable display game. Done in

JP 2013-192622 A

By the way, in this kind of gaming machine, although the production is diversified, for example, a more dynamic and interesting production is required.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with high interest in gaming.

The invention described in claim 1
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
Apart from the display means, it has an accessory that can change the mode (light emitting state, operating state, operating position, etc.),
The control means includes
An effect display that displays the effect information that is not the identification information in the display area of the display means can be executed, and a function of changing the mode of the accessory in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information in the effect display. It is characterized by having.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, a game machine with high interest of a game can be provided.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a reverse view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control system (mainly game control apparatus) of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 fluctuation start process and a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure change process transition setting processing (special figure 1, special figure 2). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display middle process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows a high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process shift setting process 1 in a small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a process transition setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot end setting processing 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a small hitting fanfare medium process and a small hitting medium process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hits. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit remaining ball process and a small hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows a distribution process and a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a normal map change, and the process transition setting process during a normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric power remaining ball | bowl process and a normal figure completion | finish process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure completion | finish process and the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting demo setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball lending information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows reach start production | presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows SD1 fluctuation | variation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion registration process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion data initialization process 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows a motion deletion process and a motion continuation process. It is a flowchart which shows a constant weight process and a variable weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a PB waiting process and a PB determination branch process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol reverse calculation replacement process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation scenario switching process. It is a flowchart which shows an iterative process and an end process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion control process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a bitmap addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a moving image addition process. It is a flowchart which shows 1 point designation | designated object movement processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect type designation | designated process and an effect parameter designation | designated process. It is a flowchart which shows an object deletion process and an object change process. It is a flowchart which shows an object moving image decoding process. It is a flowchart which shows a behavior index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a character drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows a display left symbol conversion process, a PB color conversion process, and a reach character conversion process. It is a front view of a game board (a movable accessory is a standing state). It is a figure which shows a starting port distribution apparatus. It is a figure explaining the effect | action of a start opening | mouth distribution device. It is a figure which shows an example of a still image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the list table for motions. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table at the time of a customer waiting demonstration. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a specific example of a normal fluctuation scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table at the time of the left symbol normal fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of the left symbol fluctuation | variation start. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the present symbol at the time of a normal fluctuation, a previous symbol, and the next symbol. It is a figure which shows the specific example (connection example) of the motion table at the time of a left symbol normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows an example of a push button notice time scenario, and a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table at the time of a variable display ending. It is a figure explaining a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure explaining the state of an image and a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure explaining the state of an image and a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of effect display.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be rotated. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) is attached to the front frame 4. The game board 20 is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame (or main body frame), and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In this embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 will be described. doing.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (also referred to as a card-type ball lending control unit or a card unit) as a game medium lending device (ball lending machine), but the illustration is omitted here. This CR unit is connected to a payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4) to be described later via a card unit connection board (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area where a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and a determination of whether it is out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) is made. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Moreover, the upper plate 7 provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds a game ball before being discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball. A push button type effect button 9 operated by the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 7. The effect button 9 incorporates an effect button switch (effect button SW46) to be described later. Further, a touch panel 9a for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 9.
In addition, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 that can move a game ball on the upper plate 7 by a player's operation, and a shooting operation handle 11 (operation unit) that performs a shooting operation of the game ball. . Here, the firing operation handle 11 is provided with a touch switch 11a (also referred to as a touch sensor) that detects whether or not a player's hand is touching (contacting) the firing operation handle 11. If the touch switch 11a detects a state of contact with the firing operation handle 11, it can be determined that the player is playing a game (ie, a game ball is being launched). The touch switch 11a corresponds to a contact detection unit.
In addition, what is indicated by reference numerals 12a and 12b in FIG. 1 are speakers that output sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12 a denotes upper speakers provided on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b denotes a lower speaker provided at the right end of the operation panel 6 (on the right side of the lower plate 10).

In the present embodiment, the touch panel 9a is provided integrally with the effect button 9, but the touch panel 9a may be separate from the effect button 9. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 9, A touch panel 9a may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.
Further, to the right of the production button 9 are a ball lending button 16 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 17. Balance display section for displaying the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment, a game ball in which a launching device (not shown) is supplied from the upper plate 7 by a player turning the operation unit (launching operation handle 11). Is fired toward the game area 22 in front of the game board 20. Further, when the player operates the effect button 9 or the touch panel 9a, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) in the display unit 41a (see FIG. 2) of the display device 41. Production can be performed.
In FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 denotes a decorative lamp using LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the glass frame 5 as light sources, and reference numeral 14 denotes a decorative lamp 13 on the right side. It is the logo display part 14 (part which displays the brand of a pachinko machine) formed in the side part. In addition, a moving light may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The moving light includes an LED as a light emission source and a motor as a drive source. Here, if the decoration mechanism is divided by the concept of the board and frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light constitute a frame decoration device 43 (frame side decoration device) shown in FIG. Constitutes a frame effect device (frame effect device) (not shown).

B. 2. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20. As described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out-ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a start-port sorting device 600 (including a special view 1 start 607 and a special view 2 start 608 described later), normal Ordinary variable winning device 26 (including start winning port 26a) as an electric accessory (general power), variable winning device 27, general winning ports 28-31, ordinary start gate 32, warp inlet 33, display lamp unit 34, many Game nails (not shown) are provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

  The center case 24 is a member (game effect component) surrounding the front surface of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 5) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in part, the center case 24 has a movable part that enhances the effect by cooperating with the lamps that use LEDs for effect or decoration as the light source and the effect display on the display device 41. An object (an accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In the case of this example, as the movable combination, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 130, a movable combination 700 having a decorative portion 701 having a rose flower motif, an upper movable combination 801, and a left movable combination. An object 802 and a right movable accessory 803 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 130, the movable accessory 700 has a substantially disc-shaped decorative portion 701 having a decoration representing a rose flower on the surface, and the decorative portion 701 is integrally provided on the tip side. The decoration unit 701 is movable with respect to the display unit 41a (display screen, display area) of the display device 41 (display unit). Specifically, the movable accessory 700 is provided in the lower portion of the center case 24, and the arm portion 703 can swing along the front surface of the display portion 41a by a mechanism and a driving source not shown. As shown in FIG. 130, the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are erected in an upright state as shown in FIG. 2, and the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are tilted substantially horizontally to the left when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. It can be displaced and stopped between a normal state) and a state between the standing state and the initial state (for example, a state inclined at an angle of 40 degrees). In the standing state, the decorative portion 701 is exposed on the front surface so as to partially cover the lower front surface of the display portion 41a (display screen, display area). The decorative portion 701 (at least the main part) is hidden in the lower left part of the center case 24 and is not exposed to the front (not visible to the player).

  The upper movable accessory 801 is provided on the upper side in the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a rose that is the theme of the game board 20 of the present example falls or rotates to the front side of the display unit 41a. It is a movable movable item. The left movable accessory 802 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the center case 24, and a movable effect member simulating a rose vine is movable to the front of the display unit 41a, for example. It is an accessory. The right movable accessory 803 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front in the center case 24, and a movable effect member simulating a rose vine is movable to the front side of the display unit 41a, for example. It is an accessory. It should be noted that these movable combinations such as the upper movable combination 801, the left movable combination 802, and the right movable combination 803 are not limited to such a mode, and may be variously modified. For example, even in an aspect in which the upper, left, and right movable effect members are linked to each other so that they can be rotated or translated so that they can be combined on the front surface of the display unit 41a (an aspect that forms a large single rose). Good. In addition, an aspect in which the upper movable accessory 801, the left movable accessory 802, and the right movable accessory 803 can move in conjunction with the movable accessory 700 to express something.

  Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). In addition, lamps for presentation or decoration provided in the game board 20 (including the center case 24) (in this example, including the lamp of the display lamp unit 34) correspond to the board-side presentation mechanism. The decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. Further, the movable combination provided in the center case 24 (for example, the movable combination 700, the upper movable combination 801, the left movable combination 802, the right movable combination 803) corresponds to a board-side production mechanism. An effect device 44 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. The movable accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

Next, the start opening distribution device 600 and the normal variation winning apparatus 26 are start winning devices including a special start opening as will be described later. In this example, the start opening distribution device 600 is shown in FIG. Is arranged below the center portion of the center case 24, and the normal variation winning device 26 is arranged on the upper right side of the start port distributing device 600 (below the right side portion of the center case 24).
The starting port sorting device 600 is covered with a decorative cover 601 on the front surface, and as shown later, the game ball flowing in from the upper surface is placed inside (the back side of the decorative cover 601). This is a winning device that flows into the start port 608 (shown in FIG. 131). Details of the start-port distribution device 600 will be described later. The normal variation winning device 26 has one start winning port 26a.
Here, the special figure 1 start opening 607, the special figure 2 start opening 608, and the start winning opening 26a are a prize that functions as a special drawing start winning opening (sometimes referred to as a start opening or a start area) as will be described later. It is a mouth (winning area). Strictly speaking, there is a start area (area where a game ball is detected as a start prize) inside the start prize opening, and when a game ball enters the start prize opening, it is detected as a start prize. A game ball inlet (a game ball inlet 606, which will be described later; FIG. 131) on the upper surface of the starter distribution device 600 is always open, and the game machine that has flowed into the starter distribution device 600 from here is started in FIG. A prize is awarded to either the mouth 607 or the special figure 2 starting opening 608. The start winning opening 26a of the normal variation winning device 26 is in a winable state (open state in which the possibility of winning a game ball is high) when an opening / closing member 26b described later is opened, and when the open / close member 26b is closed, a winning is achieved. It becomes an impossible state (closed state in which the winning possibility of the game ball is lower than the open state, zero winning possibility may be possible, and in this embodiment, the winning possibility is zero).

  The normal variation winning device 26 is a device (so-called mini-attacker) having a start winning opening 26a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 26b (opening / closing door), and is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (general power). In the following, “opening of the normal variable winning device 26”, “opening of the electric train”, “opening of the start winning opening 26a”, and “opening of the opening / closing member 26b” all open the opening / closing member 26b. It means to do. The normal variation winning device 26 may be of a type in which the start winning opening 26a is opened and closed by an opening / closing member that opens in an inverted C shape.

  In this example, the variable winning device 27 is provided below the normal variable winning device 26 (to the right of the start port distributing device 600), and has a large winning port 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b (opening / closing door). It is a device (so-called attacker). This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won. The opening / closing member 27b is driven by a special prize opening solenoid 133 (FIG. 4). Here, only one variation winning device (special variation winning device) including a big winning opening is illustrated in FIG. 2, but there may be a case where there are a plurality of the special variation winning devices in the game area 22. . In addition, this special variable winning device may be of a type in which a large winning opening is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that opens in a reverse C shape.

The warp inlet 33 is formed on the left side of the center case 24 so that a game ball flowing down to the left of the center case 24 can flow in. The game ball that has flowed from the warp inlet 33 is guided to a stage 24 a provided at the bottom of the center case 24 via a warp flow path (not shown) in the center case 24. The game ball guided to the stage 24a flows down from the center case 24 through rolling on the stage 24a, and flows into, for example, the start port sorting device 600 depending on the flow position.
The display lamp unit 34 is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps that use LEDs as light emission sources, and performs the 4th symbol shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 and the hold display (display of the number of held start winning memories).

Note that the display device 41 (production means, display means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 41, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device are used as names of members having similar functions. There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 includes a display unit 41a (display screen, display area) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a special drawing in a plurality of columns. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
The display unit 41a can display an image for presentation or information notification such as a background image and a character image separately from the special figure.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can display on the display apparatus 41 the image corresponded to what is called a common figure. However, when an ordinary map is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decorative map. When the display device 41 is configured to display a general symbol, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is identification information (special symbol) displayed in a variable manner in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is displayed in a variable manner in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). Identification information (ordinary symbol).
In the present example, the usual figure is not displayed on the display unit 41 a of the display device 41, but is displayed on the collective display device 35. The common map displayed on the collective display device 35 is referred to as a regular map as described later.

In this manner, the general display is displayed separately from the special figure on the collective display device 35 (details will be described later). The general game will be described as follows.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, a general display variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a general map variable display game) is performed on the collective display device 35, and the stopped general map is predetermined. If it is an aspect (specific display aspect), the privilege called per map is provided.
If the display device 41 is configured to display a general map, the variable display of the general map (decorative map) is performed on the screen of the display device 41. However, you may arrange | position an original common map display separately from the display apparatus 41. FIG.

When it comes to a normal figure, a game that is temporarily held for a predetermined opening time is performed in an open state in which the opening / closing member 26b of the normal variation winning device 26 is open, and the game ball becomes easier to start and win, The number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of a big hit increases.
Also, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball wins further to the general chart start gate 32, the general chart start memory is suspended and displayed on the display of the collective display device 35 to be described later. Are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the stored memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.
In addition, the hold display of the common figure start memory displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 35 is the normal figure start memory. In addition to the collective display device 35, a unique general diagram start memory display for displaying the decorative general diagram start memory may be arranged in the game area 22.

Here, the short time will be described as follows.
Time shortening is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the ordinary figure is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is improved, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. ) Opening the winning winning opening 26a (including extending the opening time of the public train longer than usual) to support winning at the starting opening, it can be held up to the number of executions of the variable display game of a predetermined special figure This is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing balls (the number of balls). In other words, “short time” means, in a narrow sense, to shorten the fluctuation time of special figure or ordinary figure than usual, but is special in the so-called ordinary electricity support state (electric support state) that increases the possibility of winning the ordinary electricity. It may mean the whole control. Special control performed in the general electric power support state is a control that changes the fluctuation pattern of the normal figure (normal figure change time, normal figure stop time, etc.) to the player as described above (for example, shortening the normal figure change time) Control to increase the probability per ordinary map, control to advantageously change the open pattern (opening time, number of times of opening, etc.) of ordinary power to the player (for example, control to increase the opening time, or control to increase the number of times of opening) ) Or any one of them.

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 35, those that display the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those that display the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.
Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.

Further, what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the display unit 41a of the above-described variable display device 41, etc. The special figure and the common figure (in the case where the variable display device 41 is configured to display the common figure) are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, when referring to the special figure and the ordinary figure as viewed from the player, this dummy display is pointed out. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative map” and “decorative map” are described.
Thus, the collective display device 35 is not intended for the player but is used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. For example, the start memory display (special figure hold display) for the player is, for example, the display unit 41a of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 20 (in this example, for example, the display lamp described above) Part of the lamps of the unit 34).

Next, the configuration and operation of the start port sorting apparatus 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. 131 (a), 132 (a), and 132 (b) are front views of the starter sorting apparatus 600 with the decorative cover 601 removed. FIG. 131B is a top view of a later-described sorting member 603 and the like as viewed from above.
In addition to the above-described decorative cover 601 (shown in FIG. 2), the start port sorting apparatus 600 includes a base member 602, a sorting member 603, a base member side magnet 604, and a sorting member side magnet shown in FIG. 131 (a). 605.
The base member 602 is a box-like member as a whole, and has a game ball inflow port 606 into which a game ball (pachinko ball) can flow from above on the upper surface. A special figure 1 start port 607 and a special figure 2 start port 608 are provided side by side on the left and lower right positions of the minute member 603.

  The distribution member 603 is disposed at a position almost directly below the game ball inlet 606 in the base member 602, and has a rotation axis 603a in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 131A). It is attached to the base member 602 so as to be rotatable by a predetermined angle about the central axis. Here, the predetermined angle is an angle range from a leftward state to a rightward state, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), on the front side of the distribution member 603 and on the outer peripheral side of the rotation shaft 603a, there are a distribution plate-shaped portion 610, a left guide wall portion 611, and a right guide wall portion 612. Is provided. The left and right sides of the distribution plate-like portion 610 are parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface. When viewed from the front, the distribution plate-like portion 610 extends in the radial direction from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotary shaft 603a as shown in FIG. 131 (a). The sorting member side magnet 605 is fixed to a position on the back side of the tip of the sorting plate-like portion 610. The game ball that has flowed down from the game ball inlet 606 is configured to flow down to either one of the left and right sides of the distribution plate-like portion 610. The left guide wall portion 611 and the right guide wall portion 612 have upper surfaces parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and the game balls that have flowed down from the game ball inlet 606 are the left guide wall portion 611 or right side. The guide wall portion 612 is in contact with the upper surface of either one. Further, in the neutral state in which the distribution plate-like portion 610 faces straight upward when viewed from the front, the left guide wall portion 611 is located on the lower left side of the distribution plate-like portion 610 (on the left side of the rotation shaft 603a), and this left side The upper surface of the guide wall 611 extends in an obliquely downward left direction from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 603a, while the right guide wall 612 is positioned to the lower right (right side of the rotation shaft 603a) of the distribution plate-like portion 610. And the upper surface of this right side guide wall part 612 is comprised so that it may become the attitude | position extended toward the lower right direction from the outer periphery vicinity of the rotating shaft 603a.

The base member-side magnet 604 and the sorting member-side magnet 605 are permanent magnets, and the base member-side magnet 604 is directly below the game ball inlet 606 on the inner surface on the back side of the base member 602 as shown in FIG. 131 (b). In the neutral state, the sorting member-side magnet 605 is located at a position (neutral position) facing substantially directly in front of the base member-side magnet 604 in the neutral state. Further, the sorting member side magnet 605 is fixed at a position (a position on the back side of the tip of the sorting plate-like portion 610) that is separated from the central axis of the rotating shaft 603a on the back side of the sorting member 603 by a predetermined dimension. In FIG. 131 (b), only the periphery of the base member side magnet 604 and the sorting member side magnet 605 (including the special figure 1 start port 607 and the special figure 2 start port 608) is shown to avoid complication. Others are not shown.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 132A and 132B, the sorting member side magnet 605 is opposed to the substantially front side of the base member side magnet 604 as the sorting member 603 rotates with respect to the base member 602. With this position (neutral position) as the center, it can move so as to swing a predetermined angle from side to side. Here, the base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 are fixed in such a posture that the opposite sides have the same polarity, and are configured to repel each other by magnetic force. Also, the game ball that has flowed down from the game ball inlet 606 to the inside of the start-up distribution device 600 (that is, the inside of the base member 602) is indicated by the position P (front surface of the distribution member 603) in FIG. 131 (b). First, a position immediately below the game ball inlet 606).

  In the starter sorting apparatus 600 having the above-described configuration, the detailed dimensions and positional relationships of the respective parts are set, so that the configuration of the game ball P as described below is achieved while having a configuration without a driving source such as a motor. Minute operation is realized. That is, the sorting member 603 is in a right-sided state in which the sorting member-side magnet 605 is on the right side of the base member-side magnet 604 when viewed from the front due to the repulsion due to the magnetic force in the natural state where the game ball P does not flow in (see FIG. 131 (a)) or a left-side state in which the sorting member side magnet 605 is on the left side of the base member side magnet 604 when viewed from the front (a state opposite to the left and right in FIG. 131 (a)). It has stopped at. That is, in the natural state where the game ball P does not flow in, the sorting member 603 is maintained in the above-described neutral position (the right side state or the left side state) by the repulsion due to the magnetic force. However, when the game ball P flows in from the game ball inlet 606 and falls, the game ball P falls on either the left side or the right side as viewed from the front of the distribution plate-like portion 610, and the left guide wall portion 611 or the right side By abutting on and pushing down the upper surface of any one of the guide wall portions 612, rotation of the sorting member 603 in one direction (that is, rotational movement of the sorting member side magnet 605) occurs. As shown in FIG. 132 (a) or (b), the dropped game balls P are distributed to one of the special figure 1 starting port 607 and the special figure 2 starting port 608 and flow in (win). As a result, when the game ball P enters the starting port, the sorting member 603 switches from the right side state to the left side state, or vice versa, from the left side state to the right side state. Each time a game ball enters from the game ball inlet 606 and falls, a similar operation with a different direction is alternately performed. That is, the game ball flowing into the game ball inflow port 606 alternately flows into the special figure 1 start port 607 or the special figure 2 start port 608 by such an operation of the start port distribution device 600. In other words, if the game ball that has flowed into the game ball inlet 606 wins the special figure starting port 607, the game ball that flows into the game ball inlet 606 next wins the special figure two start port 608, and the game If the game ball that has flowed into the ball inlet 606 wins the special figure 2 starting port 608, the game ball that flows into the game ball inlet 606 next wins the special figure 1 starting port 607.

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the back side of the game board 20 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank (not shown), a guide path (not shown), a payout unit (not shown), a card unit connection board (not shown), and an external information terminal board 55 (see FIG. 4), a payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4), a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 500 (shown in FIG. 4). Among these, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 3, the box of the effect control device 300 is not directly visible, and a box for storing the substrate of the effect control device 300 is disposed behind the cover member (not shown). The cover member has a function of preventing a game ball from entering the back of the gaming machine, and has a structure that can be opened and closed in a door shape, for example. However, as shown in FIG. 3, the volume switch (volume SW) 388 and the setting confirmation LED 339 of the effect control device 300 are exposed on the back side of the game board 20, for example, an operator of a gaming machine manufacturing factory or a game shop. The store clerk can operate the volume SW 338 while looking at the setting confirmation LED 339. The volume switch 388 sets the volume or volume range of the sound output from the speakers 12a and 12b, and the setting confirmation LED 339 lights up when the volume SW 338 reaches a predetermined operation position. That is, if the setting value changed by the volume SW 338 does not match the default setting value registered in the backup RAM (for example, FeRAM 327 described later) by the control of the effect control device 300 (not shown), the setting confirmation LED 339 is used. Is turned off, and when the setting value changed by the volume SW 338 matches the default setting value, the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on. In this way, when the setting confirmation LED 339 is lit in the default setting, the operator does not see the small number on the scale of the volume SW 338 (or does not see this number), but the volume SW 338 is set to the default. It is very easy to switch to this setting.

The storage tank stores balls before they are dispensed in advance, and the shortage of balls in the storage tank is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). A ball is replenished. The balls in the storage tank are guided by the guide path and discharged to the above-described upper plate 7 by the dispensing unit. The payout unit can discharge a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of the built-in payout motor, and the payout unit detects a payout ball detection switch (not shown). ) Is detected.
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the hall management device.

The payout control device 200 performs control (including control of the payout unit) necessary for paying out game balls (both prize ball payout and rental ball payout), and a circuit that realizes this control function in a predetermined case A substrate is accommodated. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control device 200 is connected to the game control device 100 and discharges a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the upper plate 7 based on payout control commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Controls the payout of prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the lending payout for discharging a predetermined number of game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 7 based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit.
The game control device 100 controls the solenoids and the like disposed on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game ( A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case.

The production control device 300 controls the display device 41, the decoration lamp, the production device, and the speakers 12a and 12b based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100. This control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit) side that lends a ball. If the wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that it is impossible to launch a game ball.
In general, when changing the model of the pachinko machine, the entire pachinko machine except the card unit is replaced, or the pachinko machine frame side (including the payout control device) is left and the game board side (game board and game machine) In some cases, only a main control device such as a control device is exchanged.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device (not shown), and a power supply device 500 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal (not shown). Yes. The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device or control means. The detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described later.
The inspection device connection terminal includes, for example, a photocoupler 179 (shown in FIG. 4), and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the gaming microcomputer 101 to the inspection device 185 is connected. .

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1 switch in FIG. 4), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2 switch in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a grand prize. Detection signals from the mouth switch 124, the magnetic sensor 126, the panel radio wave sensor 127, the glass frame open detection switch 211, and the front frame open detection switch 212 (in FIG. 4, the main body frame open detection switch) are input.
Here, the first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the special figure 1 start port 607, and the second start port switch 121 is the start winning port 26a or Special figure 2 This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects one game ball at a start opening 608 one by one. In the case of this example, the second start port switch 121 (start port 2 switch) is described as being common to the start winning port 26a and the special figure 2 start port 608, but the start winning port 26a and the special figure 2 are described. There may be a mode in which two starters 608 are provided separately and there are a total of two.
The big prize opening switch 124 is a similar sensor (so-called count switch) for detecting a game ball won in the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27. When there are a plurality of prize winning openings 124, about one or two of these prize winning opening switches 124 are provided as a whole.
Further, the winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning ports, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting one game ball passing through the usual starting gate 32 one by one.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

Further, the magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127 are sensors that are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 and the like and detect fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensor 126 is arranged in each of the general winning ports 28, 30, 31 on the game board 20 and the large winning ports 27a of the variable winning device 27 (that is, arranged in four places), and the general winning ports 28, 30, 31, This is a sensor for detecting fraud, such as stacking game balls using magnets around the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 to make it easy to win each prize opening. Note that the magnetic sensor 126 may be configured not to be arranged at four places as described above but to be arranged at more places.
When there are k installation places, k magnetic sensors 126 are provided, one for each, as a whole. Similarly, when there are m installation points of the panel radio wave sensor 127, m pieces are provided, one for each.
Further, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame (main body frame) open detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with a proximity I / F 163 that processes signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, and 127, which will be described in detail later.

Here, the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 132 and 133 to be described later driven by the game control device 100 have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM (RAM 101C described later) of the gaming microcomputer 101 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit that generates and recovers from a power failure. A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal to notify is provided.

Note that a RAM clear switch (RAM initialization switch) 504 for initializing the RAM and the like inside the gaming microcomputer 101 is provided in the game control device 100 in this example. ) Switch 504 may be provided in the power supply device 500.
In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, Alternatively, it may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and detects the occurrence of a power failure and changes (for example, turns on) the power failure monitoring signal when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

An initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504. The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on. Information stored in a RAM area such as the work RAM 101C and a similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized.
In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeated in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 101 or the payout microcomputer (the microcomputer of the payout control device 200). Is read. The reset signal is a kind of forced reading signal and resets the entire control system.

Next, the game control device 100 is connected to the payout control device 200, the production control device 300, the general power solenoid 132, the special winning opening solenoid 133, and the collective display device 35.
The game control device 100 can be connected to a test firing test device (not shown) via a relay board 170 (connected during a test in a test engine). The test fire testing device is used by an authorized organization to perform a test fire test of a gaming machine.
Further, the game control device 100 is configured so that external information of the game control device 100 is output to a management device as an external device via the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 with a cable, and relays when transmitting external information to a management device (not shown, for example, a device called a hall computer) as an external device.
Note that the management device collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the amusement store, and performs processing such as calculation processing and tabulation display of information necessary for business.

Here, as external information, for example, a signal for notifying the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a jackpot signal for notifying a jackpot generated in the course of game progress, and a condition for rotating a symbol (special figure) A start port signal that informs the winning entry to the start port, the symbol starts rotating, or the symbol determination number signal that notifies symbol rotation when the symbol stops rotating, and the gaming state is in a state advantageous to the player This is a signal that informs the outside, such as a privilege state signal that indicates (so-called probability change state, short time state), and is collectively referred to as a gaming machine state signal.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by serial communication. On the other hand, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, a frame radio wave fraud signal, a payout busy signal, and a touch switch signal are output from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, a solenoid connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
The general electric solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26b of the normal variable winning device 26, the large prize opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the open / close member 27b of the variable winning device 27, and the collective display device 35 is a so-called general public device as described above. The display of a figure, the display of a special figure, and also the hold display of a special figure and a usual figure, and the display of a game state are performed.
In addition, data (command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 and devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The production control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, a sound source LSI 313 that controls output of various melody and sound effects, and the like. However, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 corresponds to a control device and control means.
The production control device 300 analyzes a control command (consisting of MODE and ACTION data described later) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the production content, and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41. Or the sound source LSI 313 is instructed to reproduce sound, and the speakers 12a and 12b are driven to produce sound effects, and the drive control of the above-described board decoration device 42, frame decoration device 43, and board effect device 44, etc. Execute the process. Further, when the production control device 300 receives an error notification instruction from the game control device 100, it outputs a signal to an error notification LED (not shown) to turn it on.
Here, in addition to a single command (for example, a stop command), the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 does not start the presentation alone, and exhibits the effect in pairs. This is, for example, “variation pattern command + designation command” at the start of special figure fluctuation.

In addition to the above, main commands are described as probability information commands. This is prepared in correspondence with the special figure game mode flag (see steps S25, S30, S694, S779, A248, etc. described later), and reflects the probability state at that time.
Note that even if the presentation control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, for example, the screen of the display device 41 does not change immediately with the command alone, but an internal for producing the screen. Just change the parameters. Thereafter, when a command for changing the screen (fluctuating system, customer waiting demo command, etc.) is received, it is reflected as the probability state at that time.
Also, since it is determined that the probability of hitting the jackpot is low, even if the jackpot command is received without receiving the probability information command, the internal parameter may be forcibly rewritten with a low probability.
Examples of information known from the probability information command include the following.
・ "Low probability and short time (so-called 100 short rotations)"
・ "High probability and short time (so-called probability change)"
Here, the “probability information” in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only “whether or not it is probable change” but also information “whether or not time is short”. The state of the gaming machine can be broadly divided into four types: “low probability / short time”, “low probability / short time”, “high probability / short time”, and “high probability / short time”. In the present embodiment, the above three types (excluding “low probability / no time saving”) are used, and the probability information command further includes information on the effect mode (described later). The probability information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the timing when each state changes.
Note that the command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In this embodiment, a serial communication method is adopted as command communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 200 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 200 will be described.
Although not shown, the payout control device 200 is a payout microcomputer (referred to as a payout microcomputer) for controlling the payout of game balls (award ball payout or rental payout), an error number indicator, an error release switch, An inspection device connection terminal is provided. The payout control device 200 corresponds to a control device.
Here, the inspection apparatus connection terminal is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer to the inspection apparatus is connected. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number indicator lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error cancel switch outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.

As devices connected to the input side of the payout control apparatus 200, although not shown, there are an overflow switch, a frame radio wave sensor, a payout ball detection switch, and a chute ball break switch.
Here, the overflow switch is a switch for detecting that the game balls in the lower tray 10 are excessive, the frame radio wave sensor is provided on the front frame 4 or the glass frame 5, for example, a sensor for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and payout The ball detection switch is a switch for detecting game balls (award balls or rental balls) that are paid out toward the upper plate 7 by the payout unit described above one by one, and the chute ball cut switch is a chute that supplies the game balls to the storage tank described above. This is a switch for detecting that there is no game ball.
The frame radio wave sensor is a sensor that detects fraud such as acquiring a game ball of a specified number or more by preventing radio waves from reacting when the game ball to be paid out passes through the payout ball detection switch. The frame radio wave sensor may detect other unauthorized radio waves.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, the equipment connected to the output side of the payout control device 200 is a payout motor, a card unit connection board, a firing control device, and an external information terminal board 55 (shown in FIG. 4). )
The payout control device 200 performs control for driving the payout motor of the payout unit and paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100. Also, the payout control device 200 drives a payout motor based on a BRQ signal (lending request signal) from a card unit (CR unit) connected to the card unit connection board, and pays out a ball. Take control.

Further, an operation panel board (not shown) is connected to the card unit connection board, and this operation panel board is provided with a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, a return switch (provided in the pachinko machine 1). These are not shown). The operation panel board receives signals from the ball lending LED and balance indicator from the card unit (CR unit) and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) to pay out the lending ball. The necessary control is performed. Here, the ball lending switch is a switch that is activated by the operation of the above-described ball lending button 16 (FIG. 1). The return switch is a switch that is activated by operating the discharge button 17 (FIG. 1).
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied from the power supply device 500 to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 outputs a prize ball signal (ball number information paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to a management device as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. To do.
The external information terminal board 55 is also connected to the payout control device 200 with a cable, and relays when the prize ball signal is transmitted to a management device as an external device.

  The launch control device (not shown) receives supply of necessary power from the payout control device 200, and also receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls the launch motor of the launch device that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device includes a touch switch 11a provided on the launch operation handle 11 and a launch stop switch (not shown). The signal from is input. The launch stop switch temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. The touch switch 11a detects whether or not the player's hand or the like is touching the firing operation handle 11, and corresponds to contact detection means. In the present embodiment, the detection information of the touch switch 11a (contact detection means) is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 as a touch switch signal (shown in FIG. 4), and further the effect control is performed from the game control device 100. It is configured to be transmitted as command data to the device 300 (see the gaming machine state check process described later). Thereby, the production control device 300 is configured to always monitor the presence or absence of contact of the player with the firing operation handle 11 (operation unit).

Next, a detailed configuration of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus that comprehensively controls games, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a gaming microcomputer (that is, a gaming microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, The data bus 153 connects the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU section 150 includes a gaming microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. Circuit 113. A signal (start winning prize detection signal) from the proximity I / F 163 described later is input to the gaming microcomputer 101, and an inversion circuit including an inverter that logically inverts this signal is further provided in the CPU unit 150. Also good.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written as needed. The ROM 101B stores non-changeable information (program, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores a work area of the CPU 101A and various signals and random number storage areas during game control. Used as As the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or the ordinary electric solenoid 132, the big prize opening solenoid 133, and the collective display device 35. Or the like, and the entire pachinko machine 1 is controlled.
Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 is a jackpot random number for determining the big hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a hit random number for determining the hit of the common figure variation display game, etc. And a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 101A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the update timing of the random number generation circuit And a clock generator for generating a clock for supplying the signal.

  Here, a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500 is used for the electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the general-purpose solenoid 132 and the special prize opening solenoid 133 driven by the game control device 100. DC voltage is supplied to enable operation.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control device 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161, and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a large winning port switch 124, a magnetic sensor 126, a panel radio wave sensor 127, and a glass frame open detection switch. 211 and a detection signal from the front frame (main body frame) open detection switch 212 are input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 163 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the proximity switch (the above switches 120 to 124, 127) is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, the lead An abnormal state in which the line is cut and floated can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. The proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 500 in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above. ing.

Here, a part of the output (excluding the abnormality detection signal) of the proximity I / F 163 (output from each of the switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the third input port 162, and the microcomputer for gaming is supplied via the data bus 153. 101 is read from the game control device 100 as a main board via a relay board 170 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown).
Further, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 127 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the second input port 161 and read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.

Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 101 in addition to the third input port 162 without an inverting circuit. ing. It is necessary to provide an inverting circuit here, assuming that the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 receives a signal from a micro switch or the like, and that the negative logic, that is, the low level (0 V) is set to the effective level. Is designed to detect as. In this example, since the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 can detect the positive logic as an effective level, an inverting circuit is not necessary.
Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the above-described abnormality detection signal that is output when the proximity I / F 163 detects an abnormality of each of the switches 120 to 124 and the sensor 127 is supplied to the second input port 161, and the data It is read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the bus 153.

Next, a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 211 and the front frame (main body frame) open detection switch 212 and a signal from the magnetic sensor 126 are input to the second input port 161, and a signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127 is also input. Is input via the proximity I / F 163, and the abnormality detection signal is input from the proximity I / F 163.
Note that the magnetic sensor 126 will be described in FIG. 4 as if there is only one magnetic sensor 126. However, this is only one input to the game control device 100, and actually there are a plurality of magnetic sensors 126. Magnetic sensors (four in this example) are mounted, and are wired or connected on a relay board (present between the sensor and the main board, not shown).
Here, the data held in the second input port 161 is asserted (valid level) by enabling the gaming microcomputer 101 to decode the address assigned to the second input port 161 and thereby the corresponding enable signal (not shown). Can be read out (the same applies to other ports).

  On the other hand, a signal from the payout control device 200 and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 (initialization switch signal) are input to the first input port 160. These signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signal from the payout control device 200 includes a frame radio wave fraud signal, a payout busy signal, a payout abnormality status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, There is a touch switch signal as described above. Here, the overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor (not shown) provided on the front frame 4 or the like. As described above, the touch switch signal is a signal output by the touch switch 11a described above when the player's hand or the like comes into contact with the firing operation handle 11.

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command. This payout busy signal is a signal that is basically turned on when a payout operation of a game ball (prize ball or rental ball) is executed unless an error related to the payout operation of the game ball has occurred. For this reason, no error has occurred (that is, the payout abnormality status signal, the shot ball out switch signal, the overflow switch signal, etc. are not on), and the game control device 100 issues a prize ball payout command. If the payout busy signal is raised (if turned on) in a state where no prize ball payout is instructed by transmitting to 200, the game control device 100 determines that the lending payout operation has been executed. Can do.

  The input unit 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit (Schmitt buffer) 164 for inputting a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 500, a reset signal, or the like to the gaming microcomputer 101 or the like. Reference numeral 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily input to the first input port 160 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 175, 176, 177, which will be described later). 180). Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.
Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the input ports 160 to 162 of the input unit 151. The data set in each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 151 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 101 is reset.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 175, a second port 176, a third port 177, and a fourth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Note that data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 via serial communication via a Schmitt buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The Schmitt buffer 173 is a data signal from the game control device 100 in order to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300 side, that is, to ensure one-way communication. Is a unidirectional buffer that only allows the output to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300.

The first port 175 is an output port for outputting each opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 133 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 and the universal solenoid 132 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26b of the normal varying winning device 26. It is.
The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 35.
The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
The fourth port 180 is an output port for outputting external information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal. Note that the information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or management device installed in a game store. In addition, a photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal board 55, and external information is transmitted to a management device (not shown) as an external device via the photo relay 55a. Note that since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection. However, if the photorelay 55a is used as described above, there is an advantage that the polarity is unnecessary and it is convenient.

  The output unit 152 is connected to the data bus 153 and outputs data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot, etc. via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. The detection signals of the switches 120 to 124 that are not required to be processed, such as the start port SW, output from the proximity I / F 163 are passed through the buffer 174 by the pattern branch on the output side of the proximity I / F 163 shown in FIG. Without being supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay substrate 170.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information. For example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 153 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170 so that the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus. It has become.

  The output unit 152 includes a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives the open / close data signals of the special prize opening solenoid 133 and the general electric solenoid 132 output from the first port 175, and generates and outputs the respective solenoid drive signals. The second driver 178 b outputs an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 35 output from the second port 176. The third driver 178 c outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 35 output from the third port 177. The fourth driver 178 d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fourth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

The first driver 178a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 500 as a power supply voltage so as to be able to drive the special prize opening solenoid 133 and the general power solenoid 132 that operate at 32V.
Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 178b for driving the segment line. Further, since the third driver 178c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. Note that the collective display device 35 has a second driver 178b that outputs 12V, a current is supplied to the anode terminal of the predetermined LED via the segment line, and a cathode terminal of the predetermined LED that is output by the third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential. As a result, the current is drawn from the segment line through the segment line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is turned on. The fourth driver 178d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 185. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 185 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in the case of a general general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 160 to 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) in the same manner as the game microcomputer 101, and image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the CPU 311. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above, a tone generator LSI 313 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b, and a signal conversion circuit 315. .
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the CPU 311 is provided, and two CPUs are provided. VDP is a command from the 2ndCPU. However, in this embodiment, only the CPU 311 having a higher performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost. ing.

The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 stores stored contents even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure, a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 326 providing a work area, and the like. FeRAM 327 that can be held, RTC (real time clock) 325, and WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 328 are connected, and VDP 312 is also connected.
The RTC 325 is a clock element that clocks time, and can be set to the actual time by setting. The clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, for example, Production control related to time, such as event announcements and special productions at amusement stores, is possible.

On the other hand, a VRAM 329 is connected to the VDP 312 in addition to an image ROM 322 storing character images and video data, and an audio ROM 323 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 313. The image ROM 322 stores a plurality of moving images (movies) as video data.
Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but the motion data representing the character movement information and the scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
The image ROM 322 corresponds to character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes an effect command (data signal output from the buffer 173) which is a control command from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect contents, and outputs the display device 41. The contents of the video are instructed, the reproduction sound is instructed to the sound source LSI 313, and the above-described control of the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, and the board effect device 44 are executed.
Here, in this embodiment, the display device 41, the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the board production device 44, the speakers 12a and 12b, etc. constitute production means.

For example, when a variation display game is executed, a command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including stop combination (result mode) data and reach system (or variation time) data from the game control device 100. Is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 that has received this selects the change mode that satisfies the stop mode and the change time, and displays the display device 41 via the VDP 312. It is configured to control a special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
It should be noted that aspects such as special display variation display actually implemented by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, but the conditions given by the above command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 finally selects a mode by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which a certain amount of discretion is given to select the mode also in the production control device 300). Yes.

Here, as a RAM that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 311, there is a RAM 311 a inside the chip.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 313 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 313 passes through the amplifier circuit 337. 12a and the lower speaker 12b.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313 may be configured to transmit and receive commands and data using the handshake method. In that case, a call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. In general, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission by transmitting and receiving data in parallel.
The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. In addition to the image ROM 322 and VRAM 329 described above, a signal conversion circuit 315 is also connected to the VDP 312. Here, the VRAM 329 is an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322. The signal conversion circuit 315 is a circuit that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The VRAM 329 and the signal conversion circuit 315 may be provided in the VDP 312.

Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 315, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 315. Is displayed.
From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission / reception timing in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20. STS is input. It should be noted that the interrupt signal INT0-n and the waiting state for receiving commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 are informed from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT for notification is also input.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 that receives a command (data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. ing. Through this command I / F 331, the main control microcomputer 311 receives a control command (production command) from the gaming microcomputer 101, such as a customer waiting demo command, a variation pattern command, and the like.

Note that commands transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control apparatus 100 are stored in the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 as necessary.
In addition, since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. It has been.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the frame decoration device 43, and the panel. A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the motor and solenoid of the effect device 44 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 are connected to a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a light emission source other than the LED may be used as the light emission source of the panel decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43. Further, a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a moving light or an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 5, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. May be.

In addition, the effect control apparatus 300 includes a SW input circuit 336.
The SW input circuit 336 includes an on / off state of an effect button SW46 built in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5, an operation state of the touch panel 9a provided on the glass frame 5, and a motor of the board effect device 44. This is a circuit that detects the on / off state of the effect role SW (effect motor SW) 47 that detects the initial position of the current position and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
The volume input SW 338 is also connected to the SW input circuit 336. The SW input circuit 336 detects the state of the volume SW 338 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
In this example, the setting confirmation LED 339 described in FIG. 3 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 as one of the elements constituting the panel decoration device 42. It is the composition which becomes.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, in order to drive a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel and DC5V for powering the command I / F 331, a voltage of 15V for driving the LED and the speakers 12a and 12b is generated. It is configured as follows. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, the reset signal is output from the main control microcomputer 311, as a VDPRESET signal to the VDP 312, an SNDRESET signal to the tone generator LSI 313 and the amplifier circuit 337, and an IRESET signal to each control circuit 332 to 334. 300 is supplied to each device, and these devices are reset.
Note that the RAM (at least one of the RAM 311a and the RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 may be configured to be supplied with backup power from the backup power supply unit 502 of the power supply device 500 in the event of a power failure.
The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 48 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 1, and the cooling FAN 48 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.
In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board). As described above, the production control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls the speaker, the lamps, the movable part for decoration, and the like, and the main board constituting the game control device 100 Controls the movable part indirectly by sending a control command to the sub-control board. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same regardless of the model, and technically, the main board is modeled by installing a game program for each model in the microcomputer 101 for gaming machines. It can be shared even if the brand is different.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and the command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is a buffer of the game control device 100 (buffer in FIG. 4). To the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device. In this customer waiting state, the movable accessory 700 is in an initial state shown in FIG.

  Then, the game ball that is struck into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21 is a special drawing start winning port (one of the special drawing 1 starting port 607, the special drawing 2 starting port 608, or the starting winning port 26a). ) (That is, when there is a special chart start prize), a command for commanding the display of the special chart is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, and the special graphics (numbers, characters) are displayed on the display unit 41a. , Symbols, patterns, and other identification information) are displayed in a variable (for example, scrolled) display (so-called variable display), and a special map variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a special map variable display game) is played. .

And if the stop result mode of this special figure variation display game (the combination of special figures derived by the variable display) is a special result mode (for example, a doublet such as “3, 3, 3”), it is called a big hit. A privilege is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and in response to this determination, the special figure variation display game is started.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be a big hit and after the big hit game (After a special prize period, which will be described later), the gaming state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, so-called time reduction (to shorten the fluctuation display time for special drawings or the like to increase the frequency of the fluctuation display game and make it easier to win) is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed, etc.) is passed through a specified time ( For example, within a range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this big hit state, a command for instructing display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or informing the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the display unit In 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds for the big hit, for example, a big hit for 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration for generating a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations (for example, 6R or 4R) may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called abruptness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).
Furthermore, when there is the second variable winning device, if the stop result mode of the variable display game by the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, special eyes such as “3, special symbol, 3”, etc.), An opening operation (a jackpot round) in which a privilege called is generated and the opening / closing member of the second variable prize-winning device is temporarily opened, for example, for a period of up to 5 winnings within a specified time (for example, 30 seconds). Is done. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds.

On the other hand, when the game ball is further won in any of the start winning ports of the special figure during the above-mentioned special figure variable display game or big hit, the display of the special figure is stored on the display unit 41a or the like. For example, up to four are stored, and after the variable display game or jackpot state is completed, the variable display game of the above-mentioned special figure is repeated based on the start memory, or returns to the customer waiting state (during customer waiting demonstration production) To do.
In other words, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

  In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the special figure 1 opening 607 is generated, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41. When a game ball wins the special figure 1 start slot 607 during any special figure change display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.

Also, if there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the start prize opening 26a (general power start opening) or the special figure 2 start opening 608, the display device 41 displays the special figure 2 prize. A second variation display game by variation display is performed. When a game ball wins the start winning opening 26a or the special figure 2 start opening 608 during any special figure change display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. In contrast, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game is finished.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variation display game corresponding to the start winning opening 26a and the special figure 2 start port 608 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variations. There may be a mode in which the display game is performed in the order of winning.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 32 during the game, a usual figure change display game (hereinafter, referred to as a usual figure change display game) is played by the display part 41a or the like. . And if this normal map change display game result (stopped general chart) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
At this time, a game is held in which the opening / closing member 26b for opening / closing the start winning opening 26a is opened and temporarily held for a predetermined opening time. This makes it easier for the game ball to start and win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big hit increases.
Further, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general chart start gate 32, the collective display device 35 performs a hold display of the general chart start memory and stores, for example, up to four, After the usual variable display game is over, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the memory.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The control process executed by the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is mainly composed of the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds). Become.
First, it is as follows when the concept of the main structure used for description of the following flowcharts is clarified.
(A) Special device display device As described above, the collective display device 35 displays the special image and the ordinary image. In the following flowchart of the game control apparatus 100, the special figure refers to the “main special figure” displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is called "decorative drawing". However, in the description of the gaming machine, it may be described including “decoration special drawing” if necessary.

(B) General-purpose display device In the flow chart of the game control device 100 below, the general-purpose display means the “general-purpose illustration” displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. Further, when the display device 41 is configured to display a common figure and points to a dummy display for a player-oriented effect displayed on the display device 41, for example, it is called “decorative map”.
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a general-purpose display. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common figure (here a decoration common figure) display. In describing a gaming machine, a device that displays a “decorative map” may be described if necessary.
(C) Fudenden A device corresponding to Fudenden is a normal variable winning device 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Fuden).
In addition, as described above, special controls that make it easy to win a prize for ordinary power (such as a control that shortens the fluctuation time of the usual figure) are performed to support the starting prize. There are times when it is simply electric support.

(D) Special figure storage In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as "hold"), special figure storage, or special figure start-up storage, in principle, the collective display device 35 It points to the “book special memory” displayed in. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as “decoration special figure hold” or “decoration special figure storage”.
(E) Universal Map Memory In the following flow chart of the game control device 100, in the case of the general map hold, the general map memory, or the general chart start memory, “general map memory” displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. Pointing towards. In addition, when referring to a dummy display for effects for a player displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as “decoration map hold” or “decoration map storage”.
However, in this embodiment, such a usual start-up storage display is not displayed on the display device 41. In addition, you may provide the indicator which performs the starting memory | storage (in this case, the decoration common memory) display. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, it may be described including a device that displays “decorative map memory”.
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 is sometimes referred to as a special variable winning device in order to be distinguished from the normal variable winning device 26.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. When the power is restored from a power failure, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated after the reset signal is turned on and released. In addition, when the operator wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like (for example, the RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, the power supply while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the game control device 100. It is necessary to turn on the switch.

  When the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed first, and then a stack pointer setting for setting a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs is set. Processing (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 is inputted to the first input port 160, and the initialization is performed by reading the state of the first input port 160 before the start of the standby time. The operation of the switch (RAM initialization switch 504) can be reliably detected. In other words, if the status of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S9). Even when the power delay timer is set in step S7 and the timer is counting, the power failure monitoring in step S9 is performed.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is powered off. Wait for it. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, since the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time, a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed. It is possible to cope with the problem, and it is possible to appropriately cope with the trouble at the time of power-on. Note that until the end of the standby time, access to the RAM (for example, the RAM 101C) is not permitted, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup is performed when a power failure occurs here. It is not necessary to perform this process. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and then the timer value is 0. It is determined whether there is any (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (a signal corresponding to the binary signal “0” is output: that is, no output is set) (step S14).
In this embodiment, the RWM refers to the RAM 101C. However, the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and may include a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM.
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S14 is provided here just in case. .

Subsequently, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 101, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15). That is, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the production control device 300 and the like, the serial port is set to be used.
Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 504) is turned on from the state of the first input port 160 read in advance (step S16). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is turned on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S26, and if not, the process proceeds to step S17. .
It should be noted that the process proceeds to step S26 when the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, the power outage inspection area 1 and the outage inspection area 2 of the RWM are normal in each of steps S17 and S18 described later. This is a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or a case where it is determined in step S20 described later that the checksum is not normal. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S26, processing such as initialization of data in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed in steps S26 to S30.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S17 to check whether the value of the power outage inspection area 1 of the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If it is determined that is not normal, the process jumps to step S26. On the other hand, if the check result in step S17 is normal, it is checked in subsequent step S18 whether the value of the power outage inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). If the check result is not normal in step S18, the process jumps to step S26, and if the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S19.
Thus, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored, and the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if the values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if not stored normally), the routine jumps to step S26 assuming that the power supply is normal.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S41 and S42 described later. In these steps S17 and S18, since it is determined whether or not the power failure is restored by using the plurality of check data 1 and 2, the judgment as to whether or not the power failure is restored is made with high reliability.

In step S19, a checksum of the RWM data is calculated. In step S20, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is turned off to determine whether the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. Performs processing when recovered.
In step S21, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The areas to be initialized here are the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2, the checksum area, and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The area related to error fraud monitoring includes, for example, the following areas.
・ External information area door ・ Frame open signal, security signal ・ Test signal area gaming machine error status signal ・ Status scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
・ Front frame (glass frame) opening monitoring area ・ Game frame (front frame) opening monitoring area ・ Shoot ball break monitoring area ・ Overflow monitoring area ・ Payout abnormality monitoring area ・ Switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area Area ・ Penden Unauthorized Prize Monitoring Area ・ Magnetic Fraud Monitoring Area ・ Radio Fraud Monitoring Area ・ Large Winning Port Fraud Monitoring Area

  In step S21, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is in an indefinite state indicating that there is no. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal indicating the presence or absence of contact with the firing operation handle 11 is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  After step S21, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the probability is not high (step S22; NO), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. If the probability is high (step S22; YES), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S23), and for example, a high-probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on (not shown). (Lit) The data is saved in the segment area (step S24). As a result, the treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed. For example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on to display the high probability state.

  Next, a power failure recovery command corresponding to a process number prepared for reasonably executing a special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S25), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The region to be initialized here is a region having a value other than the value (0) written in step S27 as an initial value. In this embodiment, the region is related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the production mode. is there. Specific examples of these areas are as follows, for example.
<Area to be initialized>
Customer demo flag area (used in step S472 and the like described later)
Production mode transition information area (area where production mode transition information is saved in step S529 and the like described later)
-Security signal control timer (used in step C68, etc. described later)
-Next mode transition information area (see step S778 and the like described later)
Special game mode flag area (see step S759 described later)
Special figure game mode flag save area (see step S701 and the like described later)

Next, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.
When a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted, the effect control device 300 performs initialization such as setting the motor operating position of the effect device to the initial position, and starts the effect of notifying that the RWM is cleared. To do.

When the process proceeds from step S25 or step S30 to step S31, in step S31, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) is started.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit in the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 101A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. That is, in the process of step S32, a hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and a big hit random number bit transposition is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern is a replacement method when the extracted bit arrangement (arrangement before bit transposition) of the random number is exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). It is a pattern to be determined. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Next, values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted and saved in predetermined areas of the RWM as initial values (start values) of various corresponding initial value random numbers ( Step S33). In the case of the present embodiment, as various initial value random numbers, initial value random numbers (that is, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small hit symbol initial values) for determining the special symbol hit symbols (big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers) Random number), initial value random number (ie random initial value) of random number (per random number) that determines the hit of the usual figure, initial value random number (ie hit value of the random number per hit) Design initial value random number). In addition, as for the random numbers related to the ordinary figure, the word “ordinary figure” may be omitted, for example, “random number per ordinary figure” is simply referred to as “random number per ordinary figure”.

  Note that the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers in step S33. By setting (start value), it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers updated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

Next, an interrupt is permitted in step S34, and initial value random number update processing is performed in the next step S35. The initial value random number update process is intended to break the regularity of random numbers by updating the values of various initial value random numbers so that it is difficult to deliberately aim for a big hit etc. by timing the game ball. is there.
The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed. If it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process. There is an advantage that

Further, although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A. Are configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, the so-called “initial value change method” is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (updated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In addition, when there are two types of special drawings, the random numbers related to the special drawings may be common to the special drawings 1 and 2 or may be provided separately, but are described as being common in this embodiment. ing.

In step S36, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read through the port and the data bus, the number of times of power failure monitoring signal check (for example, 2 times) is set, and in step S37, the power failure monitoring signal is set. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S38 for final determination of power failure. If it is not on, the process returns to step S35. During normal operation, steps S35 to S37 are repeated.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, initial value random number update processing and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

And when it progresses to step S38, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will finally determine that a power failure has occurred, and proceed to step S39. If negative, it is determined that a power outage has not occurred and the process returns to step S37.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing from step S39. However, in the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S38. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to step S39, after prohibiting interruption, all outputs are turned off in the next step S40 (off data is outputted to all output ports), and then the power failure information setting process is executed in steps S41 and S42. To do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S41, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S42.
After step S42, a checksum is calculated in the next step S43 when the RWM is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S44 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, in step S45, access to the RWM is prohibited, and then waiting (waiting for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off).
In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S39 to S45 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step S53, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculation address is updated by “+1”, and in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” to check whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. When the number of repeated times is equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation has been completed, and the process exits from step S57 to YES and ends the routine.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (update (+1)) the big hit symbol initial value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (update (+1)) the small hit symbol initial value random number (step S62), A process of incrementing (update (+1)) the initial random number (step S63) and a process of incrementing (update (+1)) the initial symbol random number (step S64) are sequentially performed.
Here, as described above, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. In this way, the randomness of the random number is increased by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this timer interrupt process, a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 101A and an interrupt (timer interrupt) is generated by the processes of steps S31 and S34 in the main process described above. Start with. When this timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 101, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When this timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S70). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S71). In step S71, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input processing is executed in step S72. In this input process, the detection signals (states of the respective input ports) of the respective sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, big winning port switch 124, etc.) are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step S73, an output process for setting and outputting the output data set in each step described later to the corresponding output port is executed. This is a process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 133, general electric solenoid 132) based on output data set in various processes.
When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output process (see step S138a described later), and the state in which the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. It is said. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state as viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (also a launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state as viewed from the payout control device is also included. It is generated in the payout control device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, in step S74, a payout command transmission process is performed. This is a process of outputting a command set in the transmission buffer of the gaming microcomputer 101 to the payout control device 200 in various processes.
Next, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. Although details will be described later, in the random number update process 1, initial values of random numbers (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, regular hit symbol random number, regular hit symbol random number) are set by the initial value random number, and random number update processing 2 Then, the fluctuation pattern random number is updated by software. Among these, according to the random number update process 1, the initial value of each random number is updated by the “initial value changing method” described above. In addition, according to the random number update process 2, each time the timer interrupt process routine is repeated, the variation pattern random number changes, and the extracted value of the variation pattern random number maintains at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, in step S77, a winning opening switch monitoring process and a state monitoring process are executed. In the winning opening switch monitoring process, the input flags (the start opening switches 120 and 121, the winning opening switch 123, the big winning opening switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above are monitored, and for example, the input of the big winning opening switch 124 is monitored. When the flag is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the state monitoring process includes an undetected error of each of the sensors described above, an excessive error of the winning ball discharge, an open state of the glass frame 5, and an illegal winning except when the large winning opening 27a and the public power supply 26 are not open. It is a process for monitoring.

Next, in step S78, special figure game processing is performed. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the special symbol stop pattern (result form), and the process of setting the change form of the special figure (Details will be described later).
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot ends, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 300 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S79, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.
Next, in step S80, segment LED editing processing is executed. This is the display of the special figure on the collective display device 35, such as the special figure decided in the special figure game process in step S78, the special figure decided in the common figure game process in step S79, and other information. This is a process for displaying on a display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126. For example, if an input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is assumed that a magnetic error has occurred and a predetermined process ( For example, preparation of a fraud notification command).

Next, in step S82, panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing is executed. This is to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127. For example, if the input flag of the panel radio wave sensor 127 is set, it is assumed that fraud using radio waves has occurred. Then, a predetermined process (preparation of fraud notification command, etc.) is executed.
Next, in step S83, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control apparatus 100 to the outside.
After step S83, the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 160 is read (step S91). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 160) are as follows.
・ Frame fraud signal (bit 0)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 1)
・ Discharge abnormality status signal (bit 2)
・ Shoot ball break switch signal (bit 3)
・ Overflow switch signal (bit 4)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 5)
-RAM initialization switch (bit 6)
・ Power failure monitoring signal (bit 7)
Note that bit 6 and bit 7 are not used in this input process, and are cleared in step S92.

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93).
Next, in step S94, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 161 is prepared. In step S95, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared.
In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S96, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S97. For example, since the panel radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, it prepares bit data for such a sensor / switch or the like.
Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. These data have the same name in the flowchart, but are different data for each input port. However, there is a possibility that the data has the same value as a result.

Next, switch reading processing is performed in step S98.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 161) are as follows.
-Panel radio wave sensor (bit 0) (inverted bit):
Switch abnormality detection signal (bit 1): “Abnormality detection signal” in FIG.
・ Magnetic sensor (bit 2):
・ Glass frame open detection switch (bit 3)
-Front frame (body frame) open detection switch (bit 4)
・ Unused (bits 5 to 7)

Next, in step S99, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 162 is prepared. In step S100, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared. In step S101, unused bit data is prepared. Thereafter, bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S102, and switch reading processing is further performed in step S103, and the input processing is terminated.
Here, the switches monitored at the input port 3 (third input port 162) are as follows.
Start port 2 switch (bit 0): second start port switch 121
Start port 1 switch (bit 1): First start port switch 120
-Left winning mouth switch (bit 2): Winning mouth switch 123-1
・ Right winning entrance switch (bit 3): Winning exit switch 123-2
Gate switch (bit 4): Gate switch 122
・ Big prize opening switch (bit 5): Big prize opening switch 124
・ Unused (bits 6-7)
It should be noted that the signals of the switches of the above bits 0 to 5 are subjected to a test firing test via the relay board 170 by pattern branching on the input side of the third input port 162 (the output side of the proximity I / F 163) as shown in FIG. It is configured to be output as a test signal to the apparatus. That is, the signal of the start port 2 switch (bit 0) is “start port 2 winning signal” and “ordinary electric accessory 1 winning signal 1”, and the signal of the start port 1 switch (bit 1) is “start port 1 winning signal”. ”, The signal of the left winning mouth switch (bit 2) is“ normal winning mouth 1 winning signal ”, the signal of the right winning mouth switch (bit 3) is“ normal winning mouth 2 winning signal ”, and the gate switch (bit 4). ) Signal is output to the test fire test device as “gate signal 1 according to normal symbol 1”, and the signal from the big prize opening switch (bit 5) as “special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1”. It has become.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the switch reading process (steps S98 and S103) in the above input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S112), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S113), and then the target switch control area in the RWM Save (store) in port input state 1 (step S114). Thereafter, it waits for a delay time (0.1 ms; s represents a second) until the second reading (step S115).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S116). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S117), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S118), and then the port input state of the target switch control area 2 is saved (stored) (step S119). After that, the bit that has changed in the first and second readings, that is, the signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second states of the read input port state is “1” and the different bit is “0”. Next, the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated and set as the definite bit this time (step S121).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created by setting the same bit in the first and second readings to 0 and different bits to 1 (step S122), and the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the final state at the previous interrupt. Is taken as the previous hold bit (step S123). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current confirmed bit and the previous retained bit are combined, saved in the RWM as the current finalized state (step S124), exclusive-ORed with the previous and current finalized state, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge ( Step S125), the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. Also, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical channel.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period by performing the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step S73) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, all output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 4) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 35 is first turned off (step S131). Subsequently, the data output to the first port 175 having the function of outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the ordinary power solenoid 132 is synthesized and output (step S132).
Next, the digit counter value for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 35 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the digit counter value is updated. The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S134). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are synthesized (step S134a). The external information to be synthesized here is “door / frame opening signal” (that is, the opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)) and “security signal” (when various fraud is occurring, RAM And a signal output for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing.
In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process means extracting data from ROM (ROM 101B in the game control device 100 of this example).

Thereafter, the data synthesized in step S134a is output to the digit output port (third port 177) and the external information output port (fourth port 180) (step S135). The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
Next, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the loaded segment output data is output to the segment output port (second port 176) ( Step S137). The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 35.
In the present application, as in step S136, “loading” data in the control process means that data is extracted from the RAM (RAM 101C in the game control device 100 of this example).
In addition, the predetermined LED in the collective display device 35 is dynamically lit by the processing up to step S137. The display executed by the lighting is, for example, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, or a special diagram hold. There are display, general map hold display, round display, game state display (time display, high probability display) and the like.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is synthesized (step S138), and the synthesized data and the output data for permission of firing are further synthesized (step S138a), and the data synthesized in step S138a is combined with the external information / It outputs to the port (4th port 180) for a discharge permission signal output (step S138b). The fourth port 180 outputs information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal, and a launch control signal from the game control device 100 via the payout control device 200. This is an output port for output.
The external information to be combined in step S138 includes “hit signal 1”, “hit signal 2”, “hit signal 3”, “hit signal 4”, “symbol determined number signal”, “starting port” Signal "and" main prize ball signal ".

Next, the test signal output data 1 to 3 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S139). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test signal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S140).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S141). In addition, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S142). Further, the test signal output data 11 to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S143). End the output process.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S74) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 14, the left column (steps S151 to S161) in FIG. 14 is a process for updating (increasing) the output number of main prize ball signals, and the right column (steps S162 to S172) is a process for transmitting a payout command. .
In this payout command transmission process, first, a winning number counter area 2 in which a plurality of storage areas as winning number counters are provided for each number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (step S151).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 (also shown in FIG. 14) is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize counter can store up to 255 prizes. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters).

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S151: NO), the counter address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S152), and the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 are updated. It is determined whether the check has been completed (step S153). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S153; YES), the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and the above processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S154). The number of payouts (for example, 3, 10, or 14) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S155).
After step S155, the value of the remaining prize ball number area and the number of payouts acquired in step S155 are added (step S156). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not reach a predetermined number (in this case, 10) that is a reference for the output of the main winning ball signal is stored. The value of the number of paid-out prize balls newly generated is added to the value of the remaining ball area. Then, the added value is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S157).

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S158), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO), the main winning ball remaining number update is finished and the process proceeds to step S162. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159; YES), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S160), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S160). S161), the process returns to step S158.

In this main award ball remaining number update process (mainly steps S156 to S161), the external device every time the number of award balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning the winning award becomes a predetermined number (here, 10). The main prize ball signal to be output to is set. That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, step S160 is executed, and the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is incremented by one. In addition to the main prize ball signal, an external device (amusement store management device or the like) receives a prize ball every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). A signal is output, and by checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor illegal payout. In other words, the main award ball remaining number update process is performed by sending a prize ball signal to the external device based on the payout schedule from the game control device 100, thereby paying out the actual payout (the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200. ) Is performed in order to ensure consistency.
As for the prize ball signal, one pulse is output from the game control device 100 as the main board every 10 payout schedules, and one pulse is output from the payout control apparatus 200 as the payout board every 10 payouts. ing.

Next, it is determined that all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 have no count numbers and all the counters have been checked (step S153; YES), or the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO) ), If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the timer is updated by −1 (step S162), and then it is determined whether the timer has reached 0 (time up) (step S163). If it is determined in this determination that the timer (payout command transmission timer) has timed up (step S163; YES), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timer has not expired (step S163; NO), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S164). If it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S164; YES), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout busy signal is not busy (step S164; NO), the process proceeds to step S165 to check a winning counter area 1 described later.
In the determination in step S164, the payout busy signal flag set in the input process of FIG. 10 when the on state of the payout busy signal is detected is not looked at, instead of looking at the port state of the first input port 160. Judgment is made.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S165, each of the winning number counter areas 1 in which a plurality of storage areas as winning number counters are provided for each number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter of the winning number counter area 1 that is the check target among the counters (step S165).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 (also shown in FIG. 14) is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize counter can store up to 65,535 prizes. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters). The difference between the winning number counter area 2 and the winning number counter area 1 described above is the storage capacity of each counter.

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S165: NO), the counter address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S166), and the count numbers of all counters in the winning number counter area 1 are updated. It is determined whether or not the check has been completed (step S167). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S167; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S167; NO), the process returns to step S165 and the above process is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S165 that there is a count number (step S165; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S168), and the winning number counter area 1 A payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S169), and the acquired payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S170). After step S170, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area used in steps S162 and S163 (step S171), and request flag (payout request flag) data (payout request flag) data ( The information indicating that the flag is set) is saved (step S172), and the command transmission process is terminated. Here, in step S172, in the game control device 100, it is possible to determine by other processing that the player (the game control device 100) has requested payout to the payout control device 200 (instructed the payout operation of the prize ball). In order to do this, the data of the payout request flag is set (the flag is set to be on).

  Through the processing of steps S162 to S171 described above, a payout number command (a type of payout command) instructing payout of game balls (prize balls) corresponding to winning is transmitted to the payout control device 200. The game ball (prize ball) is paid out based on the number command. As described above, the payout number command is not transmitted every timer interruption, but is transmitted after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). Further, the payout control board side being in a state of paying out a prize ball (that is, the payout busy signal is not busy) is also a necessary condition for the payout number command to be transmitted.

The payout busy signal is turned on (busy) on condition that one or more of the following states is set.
・ Payout operation ・ Ball lending operation ・ Shoot ball breakage error ・ Overflow error ・ Frame radio wave fraud is occurring ・ Discharge ball detection switch is abnormal (switch that monitors the ball that has been dispensed)
・ Insufficient payout error ・ In an excessive payout error ・ Count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining)
When there is (when not = 0) etc.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG. .
In the random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S185).

  When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; NO), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S186), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S187). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S193). Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194).

  If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the next initial random number of the loaded normal random number is loaded next time. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S196). Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197).

  If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; NO), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; YES), the symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S198), and the next initial symbol random number loaded is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S199), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that there are three types of variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. However, as the variation pattern random numbers, 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation patterns). There are random numbers 1), and the random number update process 2 in FIG. 16 sets both as update targets, and switches the update targets each time an interrupt occurs. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S201). Here, it is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Note that the types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
-When 0: Fluctuating pattern random number 1 (high order)
・ When 1: Variable pattern random number 1 (low order)
・ 2: Fluctuating pattern random number 2
・ 3: Fluctuating pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the production random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S203). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.
Here, the effect random number update table has data for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks), and details are as follows.
-Upper limit judgment value-Mask value of M1 counter-Random number area type information to be updated (details below)
1 byte random number 2 byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (low order)
・ Address of update area

Subsequently, the value of the M1 counter in the gaming microcomputer 101 is loaded (step S204), a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired from the corresponding effect random number update table, and the value of the M1 counter is masked. (Step S205).
Since the microcomputer assumed as the gaming microcomputer 101 in this embodiment does not have a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as R register), an M1 counter is used instead. Here, the R register is used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer, and the value is constantly updated, and a random value is acquired every time it is read. The M1 counter is a counter whose value is updated every time a program instruction is fetched, and is a counter whose value changes every time it is read in the same manner as the R register. When the game microcomputer 101 has an R register, the R register may be used instead of the M1 counter. In any case, the randomness can be given to the random number by using the value of the M1 counter or the R register.

In addition, the mask value differs depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter (or the R register, the same applies below) When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether or not the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is “1”. Is added value (higher order), and “0” is added value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is the lower order of the 2-byte random number or the 1-byte random number (step S206; NO), the process branches to step S209 to set “0” as the addition value (upper order) and set the mask value to “1”. The added value is regarded as an added value (lower order) and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. If it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, “0” is set as a random value (upper order), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is updated as the value (lower order) of the random number area, and the process proceeds to step S212.
If the random number area is a 2-byte random number, in step S211, the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set as a random value, and the process proceeds to step S212.

Next, in step S212, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random value is calculated to obtain a new random value, and whether or not this random value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S203. Determination is made (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S214), and then the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and the process jumps to step S214 and proceeds to step S215.
In step S215, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower area of the 2-byte random number. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216). If the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the higher rank of the random number value is higher in the random number area (2-byte random number (upper)) side. (Step S217). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After step S217, the random number update process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), the process jumps to step S217, does not perform the process, and ends the random number update process 2.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. As described later, as described later, a fluctuation pattern of “no reach”, a fluctuation pattern (reach fluctuation mode) in various reach states such as “normal reach” and a number of “special (SP) reach” are defined. ing.
Therefore, the CPU 101A is based on the inflow of game balls to the start area (the special figure 1 start opening 607, the special figure 2 start opening 608, or the start winning opening 26a) of the start opening distributing apparatus 600 and the normal variation winning apparatus 26. Among the various extracted random numbers, random number update means for updating a reach variation mode determining random number (variation pattern random number) for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state is made.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning port switch / status monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in each of the various winning ports, and monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the detection from the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, one large winning opening switch 124) corresponding to one large winning opening switch 124 in the large winning opening (variable winning apparatus 27). (Data indicating the number of the port to which the signal is input, the bit position within the port of the signal, and the like are stored) (step S221). In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there is one big winning opening. However, in this embodiment, two big winning opening switches 124 are provided, and any of the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening of the variable winning device 27. In this case, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 124 is prepared.
Next, in spite of the fact that the big winning opening is not open, whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening is monitored, and an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S222) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 124 in the large winning opening (the variable winning device 27) is prepared (step S223), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning or not and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S224) is executed.
As described above, there are two large winning opening switches 124, and there are two large winning opening switches 124 arranged in the large winning opening 27a.
Next, a winning mouth monitoring table for a winning mouth switch in the ordinary electric train is prepared (step S227). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning at the start winning port 26a of the ordinary variable winning device 26 as the ordinary power as a winning port switch in the ordinary electric train.
Next, while monitoring whether there is an illegal winning, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S228) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table (for example, a list showing switches not requiring fraud monitoring) of the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S229). As the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there are a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31. For a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, a prize detection process is performed although fraud monitoring is not performed. In step S229, a prize opening monitoring table is prepared for the process, and a prize for updating the number of prizes is obtained in the next step. The number counter update process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

After the winning number counter updating process (step S230), a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Update (update “+1” in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S231). Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
As the types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, the following are set corresponding to the value of the state scan counter, such as a shot ball break switch, an overflow switch from the payout control device 200, for example. This corresponds to a payout abnormality status signal of the payout control device 200.
(B) When 0: Switch error 1 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shoot ball break error (c) When 2: Overflow error (d) 3: When payout error

Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and then the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1: Front frame open (main frame open)
(G) When 2: Frame fraud (h) When 3: Touch switch

Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), and it is determined whether or not the state scan counter has become “0” (step S237). When the state scan counter is determined to be “0”, the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 include the following.
(R) When 0: Switch error 2 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
That is, as the types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, only those corresponding to the state scan counter value of “0” are set.

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is performed (step S239), and a payout busy signal check process (step S240) is executed. Return to the process.
On the other hand, if the state scan counter is not “0” in step S237, there is no error to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, so that the timer interrupt process is not performed without going through steps S238 and 239. Return.
Note that the gaming machine state check process of Table 3 in step S239 and the payout busy signal check process in step S240 are executed only when the state scan counter is “0”, that is, once every four timer interrupts. Therefore, when the timer interruption cycle is 4 ms, the monitoring by these check processes is the monitoring of the 16 ms cycle.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S222, step S224, step S228) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two large winning opening switches 124 of the large winning opening (the variable winning apparatus 27) and the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric train. For the big prize opening (variable prize winning device 27) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 26), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. Other illegal monitoring.
Here, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table in the winning mouth monitoring table to be prepared in describing the fraud & winning monitoring process in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for judging whether there is an input (monitor switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of illegal prize amount area ・ Illegal prize error notification command ・ Unauthorized prize number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination)
-Winning mouth switch table address-Notification timer update information (permission / update)

  In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the large winning port switch 124. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the second start opening switch 121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning apparatus 26 is being executed based on the usual hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S242; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step S243). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S244), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, 5) or more is determined (step S245).

For example, when the number of determinations is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is counted by a count switch (large winning opening This is because when the winning of the switch 124) is passed and the signal is noisy, it is not judged as illegal, and it is not illegal, but it is not easily judged as an error. The determination number may be a different value for each switch.
If it is determined that the number is not more than the determination number (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250 to prepare a winning monitoring table (winning port monitoring table) of the target winning port switch. If the number of determinations is exceeded (step S245; YES), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S246), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (steps 246). S247). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S248), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S250), and a winning number counter updating process (step S251) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and it is determined whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S254). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

The update of the notification timer is not permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 124, and is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 124. The As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the variable winning device 27, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring is performed with the two big prize opening switches 124 for the big prize opening (the variable prize winning device 27), if the timer is updated with both switches, the timer update is doubled. The timer is updated only at the timing when the monitoring process of the other big prize opening switch 124 that performs the monitoring process is performed later, because the illegal timer expires in half of the specified time. .
Note that, when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the second start port switch 121 in the ordinary power system, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255). If the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S256), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S257). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S259), the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S260). In addition, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the fraud flag area (step S260).

If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260; YES), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S260; NO), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S261), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S262), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S230) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S271).
Here, the information defined in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table prepared by the winning port switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for determining the number of repetitions and input (monitor switch bit)
-Lower address of the winning number counter area 1-Lower address of the winning number counter area 2 (If there are multiple winning port switches for one table, it is defined for each switch except for the number of repetitions)

  Next, it is checked whether or not there is a detection signal input (more precisely, a change in input) from the winning prize switch to be monitored (step S272). If it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S281. If it is determined that there is an input (S272; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S273. .

In the next step S274, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether or not it overflows in the subsequent step S275. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the process proceeds to step S276 where the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 and then the process proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S275 that a counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and the process jumps to step S277. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for the 1-byte size and 65535 for the 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the winning number counter area provided, and if it exceeds that, the value returns to “0” and pays. You will lose information on the number of prize balls you should have. In order to avoid this, in step S274, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, but the update is performed after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area.

In step S277, in steps S277 to S280, processing similar to that in steps S273 to S276 is executed for the winning number counter area 2. That is, first, in step S277, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded, and in the next step S278, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and in step S279, it is checked whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S279; NO), the process proceeds to step S280, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2, and the process proceeds to step S281.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S279 that a counter overflow has occurred (S279; YES), step S280 is skipped and the process jumps to step S281.
In step S281, the table address of the winning opening monitoring table is updated to the address of the next record, and then in step S282, it is determined whether or not the monitoring process of all the switches has been completed, and if it has been completed (step S282; YES). Terminates the input number counter update process, and if not completed (step S282; NO), returns to step S272 and repeats the above process.

With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.
Specifically, according to the processing in the first half (steps S273 to S276), the value of the winning number counter for winning balls (payout command transmission) (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 1) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.
Further, according to the latter half of the processing (steps S277 to S280), the value of the winning number counter for the main winning ball signal (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 2) is updated. This counter size is 1 byte and takes a value in the range of 0-255. The value of the winning number counter area 2 is used in the above-described step S155, for example, for the main winning ball signal.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S233, step S236, step S239) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine status check process, first, a game corresponding to a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. A machine status monitoring table is acquired (step S301).
The information defined on the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process includes the following.
(A) Lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area (b) Lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored (c) Mask data (d) for extracting only the bits of the target signal ) Signal ON judgment data (e) State OFF command (In the case of error system, meaning of error notification end command)
(F) Status ON command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the error notification start command)
(G) Status off monitoring timer comparison value (h) Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored (including the switch state) is on (step S302). Here, “the signal is on” means an error (abnormal or illegal) state with respect to the error system, and a touched state with respect to the touch switch signal (the player's hand on the firing operation handle 11). Is in contact). “Signal is off” means that the error system is not an error (normal) state, and the touch switch signal is not touched (the player's hand is on the firing operation handle 11). It means that they are not in contact.
If the switch is not on (step S302: NO), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S303), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S304). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

On the other hand, if the signal is on (step S302: YES), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, if the shooting ball is out, the shooting ball supply switch detects that there is no gaming ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank and turns on. Then, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, a state on flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, a target state on command is prepared (step S307). Thereafter, a target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

  If the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S309; YES), that is, if the signal state has not changed, a timer is determined to determine whether error handling or the like is necessary. The target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for which it is determined that error handling or the like is necessary) ( Step S313). Further, if the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S309; NO), that is, if the signal state has changed, it is determined that no further error handling is necessary, and the target signal The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S310), the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), the target state monitoring timer is updated by one (step S312), and the target state monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Further, when the value of the target state monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S314). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the signal state (in the case of an error system, an error occurrence or release state) is confirmed. Become. However, for example, in the case of an error system, there may be a situation in which error occurrence is confirmed when an error has already occurred, or error cancellation is confirmed when no error is occurring. After the process, in step S315, the prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag region, thereby checking whether the state of the signal determined this time is the same as the state of the current error flag.

If the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step S315; YES), the signal status (error status in the case of an error system) has not changed. , It is determined that treatment (responding to a change in the state of the signal) is not necessary, and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (if the state flag is not the same) (step S315; NO), the signal state has changed (changed to a new error state). Or the touch switch signal is changed from off to on or from on to off), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the signal state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, command setting processing is performed to set a command corresponding to the signal state determined this time. That is, processing is performed to transmit either the state off command or the state on command prepared above. As a result, a treatment corresponding to the current signal state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, an error display for notifying that is notified or the notification is canceled. After step S317, the gaming machine state check process is terminated.
In this way, when an error signal or the like is turned on, a corresponding state on flag is set to prepare a state on command, and when an error signal or the like is turned off, the corresponding state off flag is set and the state off command is set. It is. In particular, in this gaming machine state check process, not only the signal on (error occurrence or hand contact with the firing operation handle 11) is monitored, but the signal off (error cancellation or firing operation). The operation / state of releasing the hand from the handle 11 is also monitored and the processing is shared.
Note that such gaming machine state check processing is the same for other errors such as glass frame opening and front frame opening.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S240) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, first, the state of the above-mentioned payout busy signal from the payout control device 200 is checked with a corresponding flag to determine whether the payout busy signal is on (step S285).
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S285: NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285), and a prescribed off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S285). In step S286, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S287).

  On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is ON (step S302: YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285a). Next, a prescribed ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S286a), and the value in the busy signal state area is compared with the current busy signal state (step S287). In step S287, it is checked whether the same state continues for a plurality of interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal state area matches the current busy signal state (step S287; YES), that is, if the busy signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the set monitoring timer comparison value (the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value) (step S291).
If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the current busy signal state (step S287; NO), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current busy signal state is saved in the busy signal control area. (Step S288) Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (Step S289), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by 1 (Step S290), and the busy signal monitoring timer value reaches the set monitoring timer comparison value. It is determined whether or not (step S291).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291; NO), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. Further, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S292). The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S293), and it is determined whether the prepared status flag indicates the busy status (step S294).
Here, if it is determined in step S291 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, the busy signal state is determined.

If the prepared state flag does not indicate a busy state (step S294; NO), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag indicates a busy state (step S294; YES), the busy signal has changed from off to on, and the change is determined by the player's ball lending operation (ball lending button). The process proceeds to step 295 to determine whether or not the operation is an operation of pressing 16.
In step S295, the data of the payout request flag (saved by the payout command transmission process described above) is loaded and then cleared (step S295), and the data of the loaded payout request flag is a request flag (ie, the flag is set). It is determined whether it is standing) (step S296).

If the payout request flag data includes a request flag (step S296; YES), the payout control device 200 is executing a prize ball payout operation requested by itself (the game control device 100), and is busy. Therefore, the payout busy signal check process is terminated without executing steps S298 and S299 described later.
On the other hand, if the payout request flag data does not include the request flag (step S296; NO), there is a possibility that the player has performed a ball lending operation. Is checked (step S297).

If an error for turning on the busy signal is occurring (step S297; YES), it is determined that the busy state is caused by the occurrence of the error, so steps S298 and S299 described later are not executed. The payout busy signal check process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the error for turning on the busy signal is not occurring (step S297; NO), it is determined that the player's ball lending operation is performed (the busy signal is turned on by the player's ball lending operation). Therefore, a ball lending button pressing command (a command indicating that the ball lending button 16 has been pressed and a ball lending operation has been performed) is prepared (step S298), and an effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 200. The setting process is executed (step S299), and then the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

When the payout busy signal is turned on (busy), it is as already described in the explanation of the payout command transmission process. Except for errors or abnormalities, the payout or payout operation is in progress. Medium (in the lending operation). For this reason, if you check the status of the payout request flag and whether an error that turns on the busy signal is occurring (such as a shot ball break error, an overflow error, or a payout abnormal status signal is on) You can determine whether you are busy with lending.
Therefore, according to the payout busy signal check process, the state of the payout busy signal received from the payout control device 200 is checked, and predetermined flag data is set according to the state, and the payout busy signal It is determined whether or not a player's ball lending operation (ball lending operation by pressing the ball lending button 16) is performed based on the state, and the player lends each time the player lends a ball. The button pressing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step S78) in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the input of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 is monitored, the whole process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special game process, first, in step S321, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is performed.
In the start port switch monitoring process, if a game ball wins in the special figure 1 start port 607, the special figure 2 start port 608, or the start winning port 26a, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, A game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on a prize in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the big prize opening switch 124 provided in the variable prize winning device 27.

Next, in step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step S324). When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The figure game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 22) is set in the register (step S325), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step S326). . Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game process number (step S328).
The special figure game process timer is a timer value set to a predetermined value in each process after branching by a process number described later (steps S329 to S339: corresponding to process number = 0 to process number = 10). Yes, this special figure game processing timer is set to have a timing to execute step S329 and subsequent steps when the time is up. Accordingly, when it is time to execute step S325 and subsequent steps when step S323 is executed, the determination result of step S324 becomes affirmative and steps S325 and later (including steps S340 to S343) are executed. . And when step S323 is performed and it is not the timing which should perform step S325-S339, the determination result of step S324 becomes negative and it becomes the structure by which only step S340-S343 are performed.

  In the subroutine call by the process number in step S328, the process number 0 goes to step S329 (special figure normal process), the process number 1 goes to step S330 (special figure changing process), and the process number 2 goes to step S331 (special figure being displayed). Process No. 3 to Step S332 (Fanfare / interval process), Process No. 4 to Step S333 (Grand Prize Opening Process), and Process No. 5 to Step S334 (Grand Prize Exit Remaining Ball Process). , Process number 6 goes to step S335 (big hit end process), process number 7 goes to step S336 (small hit fanfare mid-process), process number 8 goes to step S337 (mid-hit big hit process), process number 9 goes to step S338 ( The process proceeds to step S339 (small hit end process) with process number 10 to the small hit remaining ball process. The customer waiting state (during demonstration) is process number 0.

Specific contents of each process executed by the subroutine call in the process number are as follows.
In step S329 (ordinary figure normal processing), when the number of special figure hold (the number of special figure starting memory that is suspended because the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed, Processing for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. Further, in the special figure routine process, a process for starting the next special figure change display game (special figure change start process) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start process, the start memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. Is set (the setting of the variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is set, the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. If the special figure hold number is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (process during special figure change), a process for variably displaying the special figure is performed until the change time set in the special figure change start process elapses. And if the said fluctuation | variation time passes, after performing the process which transmits the command (symbol stop command) which stops the symbol of a special figure to the production | presentation control apparatus 300, it returns with the process number set to 2.
Further, in step S331 (processing during special figure display), a process for displaying the fluctuation display result of the special figure for a certain time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. Also, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of jackpot, fanfare time setting according to the big win opening pattern of each jackpot, processing during fanfare / interval Set the information necessary to do If it is a big hit, the process number is set to 3, if it is a small hit, the process number is set to 7, and if not, the process number is set to 0.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / interval processing), fanfare processing for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and an interval period display or the like is realized in the big hit interval period. Interval processing is executed, and the process number is set to 4 at the timing when the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started. Also, here, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening are performed.
Next, Step S333 (processing during opening of the big prize opening) is a process while the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 and the second variable prize winning device 33 are being opened. Also, here, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. . When the grand prize opening is finished, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (big winning opening remaining ball processing), in order to perform processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or if the big winning round is the final round, the big winning end processing is performed. Set necessary information. Specifically, for example, a process of waiting for a certain period of time is performed in order to reliably count the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 just before the end of the big prize opening, and after this predetermined time has elapsed. When the big hit round remains, the process number is set to 3, and when the big hit round does not remain, the process number is set to 6.
Next, in step S335 (big hit end process), information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is set, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, in step S336 (small hit fanfare mid-process), the big winning opening opening time / opening pattern, fanfare command setting, and mid-small hit midrange processing when a small hit occurs are performed.
Next, in step S337 (mid-hit processing), setting of an ending command, setting of information necessary for performing small-hit remaining ball processing, and the like are performed.

Next, in step S338 (small hit remaining ball processing), in order to perform processing for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, and for small hit end processing Set necessary information.
Next, in step S339 (small hit end process), information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is set, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when one of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step S340, and a table (special chart) for controlling the display on the collective display device 35 of the special figure 1 (display of the special figure 1). 1 fluctuation control table) is prepared, and in the next step S341, the control process (design fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S342, where a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of special figure 2 (display of the special figure 2) is prepared. In the next step S343, this table is displayed. The control process (symbol fluctuation control process) for fluctuation display of this special figure 2 is performed, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, in step S324, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” (step S324; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S340 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It may be used as a term having a different meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table (starting port 1 winning monitoring table) of the first starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 607) is prepared (step S351), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S352) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the first starting port (step S353). Here, the determination of the presence / absence of the start winning in step S353 is performed based on, for example, information set in step S376 described later.
If it is determined in step S353 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step S353; N), the process proceeds to step S359 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S353 that there is a prize for the first start opening (step S353; Y), it does not matter whether the special figure is short or short (medium power support being supported; low probability or high probability). ) Is determined (step S354).

If it is determined in step S354 that the special drawing time is not short (step S354; N), the process proceeds to step S357, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that the special drawing time is short (step S354; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step S355), and an effect command setting process (step S356) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game (step S355), and an effect command setting process (step S356) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start opening of the start opening distribution device 600 (Special Figure 1 start opening 607, Special Figure 2 start opening 608) will not win unless it is left-handed. The start opening (start winning opening 26a) will not win if it is not right-handed. Therefore, the short-time state is a gaming state where right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when the first start port (Special Figure 1 start port 607) wins during the short-time state (that is, the short-time state) When it is left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start port (Special Figure 1 Start Port 607) (Step S357), the special start port switch common process (Step S358) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table (starting port 2 winning monitoring table) for the second starting port (starting winning port 26a, special figure 2 starting port 608) is prepared (step S359), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S360) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting port (step S361). Here, the determination of the presence / absence of the start winning in step S361 is performed based on, for example, information set in step S376 described later. If it is determined in step S361 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step S361; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S361 that there is a winning at the second start opening (step S361; Y), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is in operation, that is, the normal variable winning device 26 It is determined whether or not the opening / closing member 26b is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step S362), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step S362; Y), a step is performed. The process proceeds to S364, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S362 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step S362; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step S363).

  If it is determined in step S361 that a prize has been awarded in the start prize opening 26a, the number of illegal prizes received in the start prize slot 26a of the normal variable prize winning device 26 is determined. Is greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5), it is determined that fraud is occurring. In the case of this example, the normal variation winning device 26 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred. If it is determined in step S361 that there is a win, the determination result in step S363 is an unconditional occurrence of unauthorized power transmission. It is not in the middle (step S363; N).

  If it is determined in step S363 that there is no unauthorized power transmission (step S363; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (start winning port 26a, special figure 2 starting port 608) (Step S364), the special drawing start port switch common process (step S365) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In Step S363, when it is determined that the power transmission fraud has occurred (Step S363; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps S352 and S360) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the monitoring target is selected from the first starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 607) and the second starting port (Start winning prize port 26a, Special Figure 2 starting port 608). No winning information of the starting port is set (step S371), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 120 and the starting port 2 switch 121 (step S372). . Then, when there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step S372; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step S372; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step S373), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step S375). Then, among the first start port and the second start port, the winning presence information of the monitored start port is set (step S376), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
Note that the extracted value of the big hit random number prepared in step S375 is used in the special figure start port switch common process to be executed after returning.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common process (steps S358 and S365) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 120 or the start port 2 switch 121.

  In the special figure start port switch common processing, first, of the start port 1 switch 120 and the start port 2 switch 121, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 1. The start port signal output count that is the output count is loaded (step S381), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step S383). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S383; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step S384), and the process proceeds to step S385. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S383; Y), the process proceeds to step S385. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows. For this reason, in this case, if the loop is “0” due to the update, step S384 is skipped and the configuration is not saved.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 120 and the starter 2 switch 121 is less than the upper limit value (step S385). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step S385; N), a start port over winning command corresponding to the target start port switch is prepared (step S399), and an effect command setting process (step S398). To complete the special figure start port switch common process. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step S385; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( In step S386), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step S387). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step S388), and the big hit random number prepared in step S375 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step S389). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step S390), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S391). The extracted value of the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step S390 is used in the special figure hold information determination process.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a prize for the first start port (Special Figure 1 start port 607) (step S392).
If it is determined in step S392 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step S392; N), the process proceeds to step S395.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S392 that the first start opening is won (step S392; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step S393), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. Save in the random number storage area (step S394). The extracted value of the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is used in the special figure holding information determination process.

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step S395), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step S396) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step S397), and an effect command setting process (step S398) is performed to perform a special figure start opening switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 101C), the start winning area (Special Figure 1 start port 607, Special Figure 2 start port 608) of the start opening distribution device 600, or the start winning area (start) of the normal variable winning device 26 Based on the inflow of game balls to the winning opening 26a), a starting random number memory is extracted, and a starting winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting memory as a right to execute the variable display game is formed. Further, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) performs first start with various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start opening (special figure 1 start opening 607) up to a predetermined number. As a second start-up memory, various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start opening (start winning opening 26a, special figure 2 start opening 608) are stored as memories. .

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step S396) in the special figure start port switch common process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the start opening prize flag saved in step S387 of the special figure start opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether the winning is the first start opening (Special Figure 1 start opening 607). Is determined (step S401).
If it is determined in step S401 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step S401; N), the process proceeds to step S404.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401 that the winning is to the first start opening (step S401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step S402).

If it is determined in step S402 that the special figure time is short (step S402; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the special drawing time is not short (step S402; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step S403).
In step S403, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step S403; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S403 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step S403; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is determined based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step S404) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step S405; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step S406), and it corresponds to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step S390. The stop symbol information is acquired (step S407), and the process proceeds to step S414.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is for the first starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 607) (step S408).
If it is determined in step S408 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step S408; N), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the first start opening is won (step S408; Y), whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step S409) for determining whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step S410; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step S410; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step S411), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is obtained. (Step S412), and the process proceeds to step S414.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step S414), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S415). Next, a special figure information setting process (step S416) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S416). S417).

  Thereafter, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step S418), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S419), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step S416 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S417 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening (variable prize winning device 27) is being opened (step S421). If it is not in the process of opening the big winning opening (step S421; NO), it is determined whether the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step S422).
If it is not in the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step S422; NO), it is determined whether the small hit middle processing is in progress (step S423).
When the small hitting is not being processed (step S423; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step S424). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S424; NO), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated.

Then, when the big winning opening is being processed (step S421; YES), when the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S422; YES), and when the small winning middle is being processed (step S423; YES). When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step S424; YES), the process proceeds to step S425.
Here, each determination in steps S421 to S424 is checked by the value of the special figure game process number. Since the process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked.

Next, 0 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening added in the current big winning opening switch monitoring process (step S425). The winning counter is a counter provided for counting the number of balls entered by opening one round of the big winning opening and adding it to the big winning opening count in the process of step S437 described later.
Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 1 (one big prize opening switch 124) (step S426).

When there is an input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step S426; YES), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step S427), an effect command setting process (step S428) is performed, and the prize counter is updated by +1 ( Step S429) and the process proceeds to Step S430. If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step S425; NO), the process proceeds to step S430.
In step 430, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 124) (step S430). When there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (step S430; YES), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step S431), an effect command setting process (step S432) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S433), the process proceeds to step S434. If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 2 (step S430; NO), the process proceeds to step S434.

  In step 434, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434). When the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S434; NO), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S435). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step S435; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step S436). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S436; NO), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning mouth counts (step S437). This is because, when a ball is won at the big winning opening, a command indicating that a winning is made is transmitted to the payout control device 200 and counted by the winning counter (step S429, step S433). In step S437, it is added to the number of winning prizes. Here, the value of the winning counter is added to the number of the big winning mouth count for the big winning mouth switch 1 or the big winning mouth switch 2.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434; YES), when the winning ball remaining ball processing is being performed (step S435; YES), and when the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step S436; YES). ), The big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
Next, after passing through step S437, it is determined whether or not the number of the big winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (corresponding to the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 9) (step S438).

If the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S438; NO), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step S438; YES), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (step S439), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). S440), it is determined whether small hitting is being processed (step S441).
If it is not being processed during small hits (step S441; NO), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the process is being performed during the small hit (step S441; YES), the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step S442), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step S329) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step S466). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step S471), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step S471; NO) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S472).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S473), an effect command setting process (step S474) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step S471 (step S471; YES), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. Details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” in step S461 (step S461; NO), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S462) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. A reservation number command is prepared (step S463), and an effect command setting process (step S464) is performed. Then, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step S465) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.
In step S466, when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step S466; NO), the special figure 1 change start process (step S467) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is performed. A reservation number command is prepared (step S468), and an effect command setting process (step S469) is performed. Then, the special-figure changing process transition setting process (step S470) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check. If the special figure 2 hold count is not "0", the special figure 2 change start process (step S462). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) in the above-described special figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, “0” is set as the process number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared and the process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set in the table. "" Is set), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, and in step S484, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. After step S484, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 ends.
As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the process number “0” relating to the special figure normal processing is set, and the flag (big prize mouth fraud monitoring information) for defining the big prize mouth fraud monitoring period is set. Processing to set is performed.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step S467) in the special figure usual process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process that is performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure fluctuation display game). 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491), and the big hit flag 1 for judging whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is shifted information or a big hit. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) for setting information is performed. Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process in step S492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step S494) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step S496) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step S497) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.
Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S493, the special figure information setting process in step S494, the variation pattern setting process in step S496, and the variation start information setting process in step S497 will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step S462) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process that is performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure fluctuation display game). 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491a), and the big hit flag 2 for judging whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is shifted information or a big hit. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step S492a) for setting information is performed. Details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step S492a will be described later.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step S494a) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495a). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step S496a) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step S497a) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step S501), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step S502). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S503), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step S504). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step S505) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value prepared matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is a big hit (step S506; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step S502 (step S507). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is not a big hit (step S506; N), it is determined whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A small hit determination process (step S508) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is a small hit (step S509; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step S501. (Step S510), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is not a small hit (step S509; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step S492a) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step S502a). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S503a), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step S504a). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step S505a) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505a) is a big hit (step S506a; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step S502a (step S507a). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505a) is not a big hit (step S506a; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination process executed in step S505, step S505a, etc. in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, processing for setting a lower limit judgment value for jackpot judgment is performed in step S511. Thereafter, in step S512, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value. Check if it is less than
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step S517, where the determination result is set to a deviation (meaning other than big hit), and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513 to determine whether or not the probability is high. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability variation, that is, whether or not the probability of the hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation state). Judgment. If the probability is high, in step S514, processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the high probability is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
If it is determined in step S513 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S515 to perform processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the low probability, and then proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value during the high probability and the low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (exceeded the upper limit determination value), and in step S516, it is determined that the big hit random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S516). YES), since it can be determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S517 to set a deviation as the determination result and return.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target big hit random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (not exceeding the upper limit determination value) (step S516; NO), the target big hit random number value becomes the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. From the time between the values (zone), it is determined that the game is a big hit, and the big hit is set as the determination result in step S518 and the process returns.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process executed in step S508 and the like in the above big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, “Step A” is used as the step number.
In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a difference is set as the determination result (step A13), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11; N), a small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A12).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A12; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A13), and the small hit determination process ends.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A12; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A14), and the small hit determination process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S521). Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step S522). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step S523), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step S524). Here, the information defined on the special figure 1 big hit symbol table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value The stop symbol number is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, the seven-segment special symbol 1 display in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S525), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 1 indicator) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S527), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step S528), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S529). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, in the case of a special big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special bonus figure 1, the transition-destination effect mode is a certain probability variation confirmation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in the probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S521; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step S530). A small-hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step S531). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step S532), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S533).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S534), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step S535). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S530; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step S536), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set to the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step S 537) and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S 538). There are 11 types of decoration special figure commands, for example, and the special figure type in the effect control device 300 can be determined based on the difference in type. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step S539), and an effect command setting process (step S540) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S541), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S542). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S543), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S551). Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step S552). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step S553), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S554). Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value The stop symbol number is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, a seven-segment special symbol 2 indicator in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S555), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S556). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S557), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step S558), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S559). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of this embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of the big hit symbol, the destination production mode becomes a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step S551; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step S560), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step S561), a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the special decoration command is saved in the special decoration command area (step S563).
An effect command setting process (step S564) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S565), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S566). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start port (speci? C figure 1 start port 607), and the second start port (start winning prize port). 26a, a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the special figure 2 start opening 608). In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process executed in step S494, step S494a, etc. in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step S571), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S572).
Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step S573), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S574).
Next, the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S575), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step S576). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step S577), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S578).
Next, the latter half variation group selection offset table is set (step S579), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S580).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S581), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step S582), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S496, step S496a, etc. in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In this variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step S591), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step S592), and the target The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) and prepared (step S593). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of place (step S594). If it is out of place (step S594; Y), a 2-byte sorting process (step S595) is performed, and the process of step S597 is performed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step S594; N), a distribution process (step S596) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S597.

  Then, the address of the latter-half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step S597), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1), Preparation is made (step S598). Then, a sorting process (step S599) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step S600). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step S601), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step S602). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S603), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared. (Step S604). Thereafter, a sorting process (step S605) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step S606), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process executed in steps S497 and S497a in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step S611). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step S612), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step S613). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step S614), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step S615).

  Then, the first-half variation time value and the latter-half variation time value are added (step S616), and the added value is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S617). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step S618), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step S619), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S620). ). Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step S621), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step S622). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step S623), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step S624), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S470) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S631, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S632. Save. Next, in step S633, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S634, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area. In step S634, the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S635, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer blinking cycle is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process for the special figure 1 is performed.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S465) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S641, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S642. Save. Next, in step S643, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S644, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area. In step S644, the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S645, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer blinking cycle is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process with respect to the special figure 2 is performed.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step S330) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step S651), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S652). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Next, a special figure display process transition setting process (step S653) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step S653) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure display process) is set in step S661, and the process number (here, “2”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S662. Save. Next, in step S663, a signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area (that is, the special symbol 1 fluctuation changing signal is turned off). Save in the output data area (that is, turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal).
In step S665, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area. After that, in step S666, the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area has special information as control information for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35). The stop flag related to the change stop on the display in FIG. 1 is saved, and the stop flag is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area in step S667, and the routine is ended.
In this way, a process for shifting to the special figure display process is performed.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S331) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step S681), and the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step S681). S682) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step S683), processing for clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step S684). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S685). If it is determined that the big hit flag is a big hit (step S685; Y), the second special figure variation display game big hit (special figure 2 big hit) starts. (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step S688). A round number upper limit table is set (step S689).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S685 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step S685; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S686) and a big hit (step S686). S686; Y) If it is determined that the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S687), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table is performed (step S689).

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step S689), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in this embodiment, “16” or “4”) is acquired, and the RWM Is saved in the round number upper limit area (step S690). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step S691).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the RWM decorative special figure command area, prepared (step S692), and an effect command setting process (step S693) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variable display game and the special map variable display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S694), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S695) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S696), and an effect command setting process (step S697) is performed.

Next, the winning opening opening information representing the big hit pattern and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S698). In the present embodiment, in step S698, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a ball (the so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise.
The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.
The special winning opening information will be described in the explanation of the fanfare / interval processing described later.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step S699), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S700). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step S701). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the winning prize port illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening information (special variable winning apparatus 27) is cleared (step S702), and the winning prize of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening information is cleared. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step S703). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step S704) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step S686 (step S686; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step S725).
If it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step S725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step S726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step S727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S728).

When it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step S728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step S729), and the production command is set. Processing (step S730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step S731), an effect command setting process (step S732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S733.
If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure has a high probability (step S728; Y), the process proceeds to step S733. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag saving area (step S733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step S734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S725; N), the high probability variation number update process (step S735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step S735). S736) is performed, the remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step S737), and it is determined whether the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step S738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step S738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step S738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step S738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step S740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, details of the high probability variation number update process executed in steps S726 and S735 in the above special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the high probability variation number update process, it is determined whether or not the special figure is highly probable (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability) (step S751). The update process ends.
On the other hand, if the special figure has a high probability (step S751; Y), the high probability change count is updated by -1 (step S752), and it is determined whether the high probability change count is “0” (step S753). The number of high probability fluctuations means the number of times that the special figure fluctuation display game is played during the special figure high probability (that is, in the probability variation mode) (the special figure rotation number during the special figure certainty change). The high probability variation number is set to an initial value (for example, 100 times) in jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 described later.
If the high probability variation count is not “0” (step S753; N), the high probability variation count update processing is terminated.

When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step S753; Y), the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step S754), and a signal related to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step S755). To do. In step S755, specifically, the big hit 2 signal is turned off.
Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step S756). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off. The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. Note that the high probability mode includes a state of “high probability & short time” (special figure high probability and normal power support) and “high probability & short time no” (special figure high probability and no general power support).

Subsequently, a number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step S757), and a general low probability & timeless flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step S758), and the special game mode flag area. In addition, the special figure low probability & short timeless flag is saved (step S759), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S760).
Thereafter, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step S761), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  When the high probability variation count update process (update that reduces the high probability variation count by 1 every time the special figure variation display game is performed) is performed, and the high probability variation count becomes “0”. Various settings for ending probability change mode are performed. For this reason, the special figure probability change ends when the special figure turns, for example, 100 times even if a big hit does not occur, and the ordinary power support (short for normal figure time) performed at the same time as the special figure accuracy change ends. However, the probability variation mode ends when a big hit occurs. As can be seen from the above high probability change count update process, special game state switching (at least special figure jackpot probability state switching) and regular game state switching (state for performing ordinary power support) And switching to a state in which the ordinary power support is not performed) are performed in conjunction with each other in the present embodiment.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process executed in steps S727 and S736 in the above special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step S771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step S771; YES), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, in the high probability state, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected. is there.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step S771; NO), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of times that the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step S772). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step S773). When the remaining effect rotation speed becomes “0” (step S773; YES), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step S774). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step S775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area of the RWM (step S776), and the effect remaining speed of the new effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area. Then, the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S778).
Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S779), and it is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S780). When the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S780; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. This is to simplify the operation by not sending a command to the effect control device 300 if the probability state does not change.

On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S780; N), the command prepared at step S779 is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S781). A setting process (step S782) is performed, and an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed (the remaining effect rotation speed newly set in step S777) of the new effect mode to be transferred is prepared (step S783). Command setting processing (step S784) is performed.
Next, following step S784, a high probability variation command corresponding to the high probability variation number (updated as necessary in the high probability variation number update process executed in steps S726 and S735) is prepared (step In step S785, an effect command setting process (step S786) is performed to determine whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step S787). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step S787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step S787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step S788), an effect command setting process (step S789) is performed, and the effect mode information End the check process.
Thus, by managing the effect mode with the game control device 100, for example, it is possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step S704) in the above-described special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S801, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S802. Save. Next, in step S803, a signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, a signal related to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S803, specifically, one big hit signal (a signal that turns on with a big hit + small hit) is turned on, and four big hits (a signal that turns on with a big hit) are turned on. In step S804, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. 1. Turn off the high probability state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and turn off the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. The big hit (during the special gaming state) is because the special figure is in a normal state (a state that is not in a high probability mode), and a state in which a general electric power support is not performed (a normal figure is also in a normal state).

Next, the process proceeds to step S805, where the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared, and in the subsequent step S806, the number at the time of low probability (number without time) is saved in the game state display number area. In step S807, a flag for low normal time probability & no shortage (no normal power support) is saved in the normal game mode flag area.
Next, in step S808, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, in step S809, the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, and in step S810, the special figure game mode flag is cleared. The special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the area, and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power command restoration transmission command area which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure restoration in step S811. Next, in step S812, the high probability variation count area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability mode is cleared. As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained. In other words, since this fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is a process executed when a big hit occurs, if it is a high probability mode in which the big hit probability of the special figure is high before the big hit occurs, a big hit will occur This ends the high probability mode, and the gaming state of the special figure returns to the normal state (low probability state). Also, in conjunction with this, if it is in a state where ordinary power support such as a short time of ordinary figure is performed (general power support state), this general electric power support is also terminated due to the occurrence of a big hit, Return to the normal state (the state where ordinary power support is not performed).

Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step S813), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S814). This is once cleared because the game control device 100 (main board) manages the production mode.
Next, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S815), a signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the game status display The number in the right-handed state is saved in the number 2 area (step S817), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared (that is, the initial value in the default state) with the occurrence of the special gaming state.
Step S817 is a process for turning on the right-handed display LED.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step S734) in the special figure display mid-process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “7” (corresponding to the processing number related to the small hit fanfare process) is set as a processing number in step S831, and the processing number (here, “7”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S832. Save. Next, in step S833, a small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, in step S834 a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S835. A signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S834, specifically, one big hit signal (output with big hit + small hit) is turned on. In step S835, the special symbol small hit signal is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S836, the prize winning portion illegal winning number region is cleared, in step S837, the illegal winning port fraud monitoring period flag region is saved, and in step S838, a signal related to the right handing instruction (launch position designation) The signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area in step S839, and the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is completed.
With the above processing, various settings are made when a small hit occurs. Step S839 is a process for turning on the right-handed display LED.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step S332) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, “step A” is used as the step number.
In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) is updated by +1 (step A31), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A32). A setting process (step A33) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A34), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A35), and the number of rounds of the special gaming state to be started is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the open switching determination value (step A36).
Here, the special winning opening operation determination table has, for example, the configuration shown in the middle part of FIG. 48, and the open switching determination value (the number of rounds) corresponding to the special winning opening information is “0”, “ 16 ”,“ 4 ”, etc.). The opening switching judgment value is a value indicating the number of rounds for switching from the long opening (opening for a long time) to the short opening (opening for a shorter time than the long opening) for the opening of the big prize opening. From the switching determination value (the number of rounds) The opening operation is a long opening before and a short opening thereafter.

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A36; Y), the special winning game opening timer area for short opening (in this embodiment, 0.2 seconds) is set in the special game processing timer area. Save (step A37) and proceed to step A39.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A36; N), the long opening big winning opening opening time (29 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A38), the process proceeds to Step A39.
In step A39, a special winning opening open process transition setting process (step A39) is performed, and the fanfare / interval process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 48, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening information 2 (All long open), (3) 16R, grand prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, big prize opening information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, special prize opening information 5 (all long), (6) 16R, special prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long, 9-16R is short), (7) 16R, large Winning opening information 7 (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open) is set.

Therefore, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 48, the big prize opening operation determination table includes the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, and the big opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value. “16” is the big prize opening information 3 data and the opening change determination value “4”, and the big winning opening release information 4 data and the opening change determination value “4” are the big prize opening information 5 data. The opening switching determination value “16” is stored in association with the big winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8”, and the big winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are associated with each other. ing. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.
The special winning opening information is information indicating which of the various types of jackpot patterns, and is set in step S698 of the special figure display process described above.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for opening a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process (step A39) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process for setting the process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” relating to the process for opening a special prize opening (step A41), and this process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A41). Step A42). After that, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A43), and the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening is stored. The information of the mouth count number area (that is, the number of winning prize counts) is cleared (step A44). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 27) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A45), and the special winning opening being released process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step S333) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening opening process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step A61). If it is not the final round (step A61; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A62), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A63). It is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A64).

If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for short closing) (1.4 seconds in this embodiment) is set in the special-purpose game processing timer area. Save (step A65), prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A66), and proceed to the processing of step A67.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; N), the remaining ball processing time (for long closing) (1.9 seconds in this embodiment) is set as the special game processing timer area. (Step A71), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A66), and the process proceeds to step A67.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A61; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for final use) (1.9 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A69). An ending command relating to the end of the big hit state is prepared (step A70), and the process proceeds to step A67.
Then, when the process proceeds to step A67, an effect command setting process (step A67) is performed in order to transmit the prepared command, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A68) is performed, and the big winning opening opening process is performed. Exit.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A68) in the above-described special winning opening open process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball processing (step A81), and this processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A81). Step A82). Thereafter, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, the off data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 133 is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step A83), and the remaining large winning port remaining ball The process migration setting process ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step S334) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round number reaches the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area. Round) or not (step A101).
If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A101; NO), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired. (Step A22), an interval time (normal) (for example, 0.1 second) is set (Step A104), and it is determined whether the current round number is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (Step A105).

And when the number of rounds is not larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A105; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is a value of rank down effect system (step A106), and the number of rounds is When it is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A105; Y), the process proceeds to step A109.
Here, the value of the rank down effect system means the big prize opening information corresponding to the big hit pattern switching from the mid-round to the short opening (big winning opening information 3, 6, 7 in the lower part of FIG. 48). .

If the big prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (eg, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A107). If the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A106; N), the process proceeds to step A109.
When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), an interval time (rank down effect) (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A108), and the process proceeds to step A109. On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; N), the process proceeds to step A109.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A109, the set interval time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A108), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A110) is performed, and the big winning mouth remains. End the ball process.
Here, when step A108 is executed, the setting of the previous step A104 is canceled, so when it is not the final round, it is before opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening), If the big prize opening information is a rank-down effect value (step A106; Y) and the number of rounds is a special effect round value (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time. (Rank down production). Thereby, the time which can implement | achieve the rank down effect immediately before opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening) is set.
Even when it is not the final round, it is after opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening), whether the winning prize opening information is not a value of rank down effect system (step A106; N), or the number of rounds is When the value is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (normal) set in step A104. In the case of the final round, there is no longer any interval period (period between rounds), so there is no need to save the interval time.

On the other hand, if the current round is the final round (step A101; Y), the game mode flag (saved in step S701) is saved from the special-purpose game mode flag save area that stores the probability state when the special result is derived. Data) is loaded (step A111). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening information, and the stop symbol pattern is set (step A112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area ( Step A113), a jackpot end process transition setting process (step A114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.
In this way, the ending time is set based on the stop symbol information, the big prize opening information, and the game mode flag at the time of the big hit.

The ending time is not limited to the above. For example, the ending time may be set not based on the symbol information but based on the big prize opening information and the game mode flag at the time of big hit.
In addition, the period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state (big hit state) (this may be referred to as an ending period) is the time for processing the remaining winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) ), And the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) elapses from the lapse of the extra winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, a total of 3.8 seconds). An ending effect can be provided on the display device 41 and the like in a period (sometimes referred to as an ending period) in which the ending time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time are combined.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A211), and this process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A211). A212).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (the variable winning device 27) (the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A213), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting is made. Processing 2 ends.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A221), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A222). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the special winning opening (the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A223).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A224), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A225). ), The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step A226). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A227), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A228), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step S335) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this jackpot ending process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is short-time operation data (that is, whether or not there is a short time when the utility support is performed) (step A241). In the present embodiment, after the big hit, 100% probability change is entered (the special figure is always in the probability change mode after the big hit is finished), so it is not necessary to determine whether or not the special figure is in a high probability state.
If it is not the short time operation data (step A241; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A242), and if it is the short time operation data (step A241; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A242). A243). After step A243 or step A242, an effect mode information address table is set (step A244), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of variation (at the time of stop symbol setting) is acquired ( Step A245).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A246). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A247), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A248).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A249), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A250), and an effect command setting process (step A251) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information of any one of “high probability / short time” and “high probability / no short time”, and further information on the production mode. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state). , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A252), and an effect command setting process (step A253) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A254), an effect command setting process (step A255) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a short-time state occurs after the big hit ends (step A256). .
When the short-time state occurs after the big hit (step A256; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end process is ended.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit is over (step A256; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A257), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A258), the special figure normal process transition is performed. A setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A242) in the jackpot end process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of a time-short state (for example, 2 signals of jackpot is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A271), and a signal related to the start of a high-probability state and no time-short state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is turned OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening status signal is turned OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension status signal is turned OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A272).

  Next, the game state display number area saves the number without time saving state (step A273), and the general game mode flag area saves the general figure low probability & timelessness flag (step A274). A special figure high probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the flag area (step A275). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A276), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A277) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A278), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A243) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A281). It should be noted that the signal related to the start of the time-saving state is saved in the external information output data area because it has been output from the big hit and continues. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 variation Save the time shortening state signal to ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal to ON, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal to ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal to ON) in the test signal output data area ( Step A282).

Next, a number with a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A283), and a common figure high probability & short time flag is saved in the general game mode flag area (step A284). A special flag high probability & short time flag is saved in the flag area (step A285). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A286), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.
With the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and a short time state.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A259) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A291), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A292). ).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A293), The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A294). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A295), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A296), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A297). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A298), the illegality monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A299), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, details of the middle hit fanfare process (step S336) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
In the small hitting fanfare process, the small hitting medium process transition setting process (step A311) is executed, and the small hitting fanfare process is terminated.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A311) in the small hitting fanfare medium process described above will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “8” for the small hit / medium process (step A321), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A322). After that, the small hit release time (eg, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A323), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A324), the on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A325), and information on the big prize mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening is stored. (That is, the number of winning prizes counted) is cleared (step A326). Then, the small hitting operation initial value “0” is saved in the small hitting / measuring control pointer area (step A327), and the small hitting / medium processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, details of the middle hit process (step S337) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hitting process, first, a small hitting / measuring control pointer (a pointer set as an initial value in step A327) is loaded (step A341), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (eg, “6”). (Step A342).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A342; N), the big winning opening due to the small hitting has not ended yet, so the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A343), A transition setting process (step A344) is performed, and the small hitting process is terminated.
If the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (step A342; Y), the big prize opening by small hitting ends, so the flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area (step A345), It is determined whether this flag is in the special figure high probability (step A346). Here, it is determined whether it is a small hit with a high probability, and the time-short state is not questioned.

If the flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A346; N), the process proceeds to step A349. If the flag is in the special figure high probability (step A346; Y), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A347), an effect command setting process (step A348) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A349.
In step A349, a small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A) is performed, and the small hitting middle processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A344) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hitting operation transition setting process, first, the value of the control pointer during small hitting is checked, and branching is performed based on the value of this pointer (step A361). That is, if the value of this pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4”, the process proceeds to step A362, and if it is “1”, “3”, or “5”, the process proceeds to step A364.
Proceeding to step A362, a wait time (for example, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A362), and off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A363). The small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.
When proceeding to step A364, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A364), and the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A364). A365), the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  By the control processing of this embodiment including the above-described small hitting operation transition setting processing, for example, a small hitting operation (a big winning opening releasing operation at the small hitting) as shown in the small hitting timing chart in the lower part of FIG. 60 is realized. . Here, the small hit fanfare time is the above step S833, the big winning opening opening time 200ms is the above step A364, the wait time 1500ms is the above step A362, the small hit remaining ball time is the step A373 described later, the small hitting ending time Are respectively set in step A403 to be described later.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process (step A349) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to “9” related to the small hit remaining ball processing (step A371), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A372). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A373). Thereafter, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable prize winning device 27, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 133 is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A374), and the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. The migration setting process ends.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (step S338) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
In the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A391) is executed, and the small hit remaining sphere process is terminated.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A391) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “10” for the small hit end process (step A401), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A402). Thereafter, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A403), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is off) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the big prize count area is cleared (step A405), the control pointer area during small hit is cleared (cleared to 0) (step A406), and the small hit ends. The process migration setting process ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step S339) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this small hitting end process, first, a game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A421), and it is determined whether or not the value of this flag has a high special figure probability (step A422).
When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A422; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure high probability (step A422; N), the production mode information address table is set (step A423), and it corresponds to the production mode transition information set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table to be acquired is acquired (step A424).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the small hitting operation is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A425). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the small hitting operation is acquired and saved in the remaining effect rotation speed area (step A426), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the small hitting operation. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A427).

Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number is prepared (step A428),
It is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A429). When the prepared command is the same as the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A429; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A429; N), the prepared command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A430), and the production command setting process ( Step A431) is performed.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A432), and an effect command setting process (step A433) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A434), and an effect command setting process (step A435) is performed to determine whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode ( Step A436). When the new production mode is not a left-handed mode (step A436; N), the process proceeds to step A439.

If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A436; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A437), an effect command setting process (step A438) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A439. move on.
When the process proceeds to step A439, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A439), and the value of this flag is within the special figure time (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure is shortened). Is determined (step A440).
If the special drawing time is short (step A440; Y), the process proceeds to step A443.
On the other hand, if the special drawing time is not short (step A440; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A441), In order to turn off the display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A442), and the process proceeds to step A443.
If it progresses to step A443, special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 will be performed (step A443), and a small hit | end process will be complete | finished.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A443) in the above-described small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A461), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A462). ).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A463), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A464). Subsequently, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A465), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A466). Then, information on the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A467), a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A468), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed. Exit.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, an effect command setting process executed in a number of steps such as step S262 in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A481), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step A482). If the transmission buffer is full (step A482; Y), the process returns to step A481 and the process is repeated.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A482; N), the prepared command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written into the production serial transmission buffer (step A483), and the process proceeds to step A484.
In step A484, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A484), and it is determined whether this transmission buffer is full (step A485). If the transmission buffer is full (step A485; Y), the process returns to step A484 and the process is repeated.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A485; N), the prepared command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written in the production serial transmission buffer (step A486), and the production command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. In this embodiment, since the command is transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication, the same effect is obtained.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps S341 and S343) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol fluctuation control process is a process of controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol of the first special figure (Special figure 1) and the second special figure (Special figure 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol. In the symbol fluctuation control process, first, it is checked whether the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure ( Step A501).
When the special figure changing flag is changing (step A502; YES), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). A503).

Here, the variation control table prepared in step S340 of the special figure game process is configured as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, for example, and information defined on this table is as follows.
-Lower address of the fluctuation control area-Address of display table 2 (for stoppage)-Address of display table 1 (for fluctuation) In the case shown in the lower part of FIG. Based on the address “D_TZ1_LED1” of the display table 1 above, “Special figure 1 display table 1 (for fluctuation) (D_TZ1_LED1)” shown below “Special figure 1 fluctuation control table” in FIG. 66 is acquired.
Next, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A504), and the value of the timer is 0, That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A505).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A505; NO), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A508). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A505; YES), the initial value of the blinking control timer (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A506). Of the second special figure, the variable symbol number relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A507), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is obtained. (Step A508). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.
Here, in the above step A508, for example, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, when the value of the variable symbol number area (ie, the special symbol 1 symbol number) is “0”, the acquired “special symbol 1 Display data “C_SEG1_OFF” corresponding to the special figure 1 symbol number “0” on the display table 1 (for variation) (D_TZ1_LED1) ”is acquired.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A502; NO), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step A510). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A511), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Here, the processing of step A510 and step A511 is also performed based on, for example, a variation control table having a configuration as shown in the lower part of FIG. In this case, “Special Figure 1 Display Table 2 (for Stop) (D_TZ1_LED2)” is acquired in Step A510 and used in Step A511.
With the above processing, among the special figure 1 display and special figure 2 display which are LED segments in the collective display device 35, the symbol number is assigned to the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display) to be controlled. A special figure corresponding to is displayed.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (step S595) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A521). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of a variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. ing.

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code with no sorting (step A522; YES), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A527) and end the 2-byte sorting process. To do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A522; NO), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A523).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A523 from the random value loaded in Step S593 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A524). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A525). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A525; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A526), the process proceeds to step A523 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, in step A523, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random value in step A525, and a new random value is obtained. A numerical value is calculated (step A524). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A525).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A525 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A525; YES). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A525 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A525; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A527), and a 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (steps S596, S599, and S605) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) or first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step A541). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step A542; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A547), and sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A542; NO), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A543).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A543 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in Step S598 or S604, a new random value is calculated ( In step A544), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A545). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A545; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A546), the process proceeds to step A543, and thereafter Process.

That is, in step A543, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step A545 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step A544). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A545). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A545 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A545; YES). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A545 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A545; YES), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A547), and the distribution process ends. To do.
The above-described distribution process and the above-described 2-byte distribution process have basically the same configuration. Since the size of the random number used for sorting is 1 byte or 2 bytes, the program instructions for calculation are different.

Next, a description will be given of a flowchart relating to the usual game process. Here, “step B” is used as a step number.
[Normal game processing]
First, the details of the usual game process (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the entire process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general power prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 121 is performed. The details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).
If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting a game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 68) in a register (step B5), and acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game process number using the table (Step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game process number (step B8).

In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
Note that details of the normal processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.
The details of the normal map changing process (step B10) will be described later.
In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, and if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, it is determined whether or not the normal variable prize-winning device 27 is in support of the general electric power (during the short-time state). A normal map display process (step B11) is performed for setting the open time of the electric train according to the above, setting of information necessary for performing the process for the normal map.
The details of the normal map display process (step B11) will be described later.

In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.
The details of the normal processing (step B12) will be described later.
If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure.
The details of the ordinary electric power remaining ball process (step B13) will be described later.
If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.
Note that details of the normal hit end process (step B14) will be described later.
Then, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) is prepared. The symbol variation control process (step B16) according to is performed, and the regular game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). If it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; YES), it is determined whether the game state is a right-handed game (step B22). If the game state is to hit right (step B22; Y), the process proceeds to step B25. If the game state is not right-handed (step B22; N), a right-handed instruction command is prepared (step B23), an effect command setting process is performed (step B24), and the process proceeds to step B25.
Here, there are the following gaming states to hit right.
・ Small jackpots / Small hits

  In step B25, the number of reserved common maps is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of reserved general maps is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (step B25). If it is determined that the number of ordinary drawings held is less than the upper limit (step B25; YES), a process (step B26) of updating (+1) the number of ordinary drawings held is performed.

Thereafter, after performing the process of calculating the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved maps (step B27), the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit number storage area of the RWM (step B28). The winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B29), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when it is determined in step B21 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or in the case where it is determined in step B25 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value ( Step B25; NO), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is performing a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of opening operation (whether the normal figure winning figure is being hit) It is checked whether or not (step B31). When it is determined that the normal map is being reached (step B31; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input to the second start port switch 121 ( If it determines with (Step B32; YES), the process (step B33) which updates the count number of a utility counter (+1) will be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (step B34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B34; YES). Then, the value of the action end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal game (step B35), the normal game process timer is cleared to 0 (step B36), and the general power winning switch monitoring process Exit.
In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  In step B31, it is determined that the map is not being hit (step B31; NO), or in step B32, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32; NO). ), Or when it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step B34; NO), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the term “per hit random number” means a random number per ordinary figure, and the term “per hit random number” means a symbol random number per ordinary figure.
In the ordinary map ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B41). If the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B41; YES), After shifting to B62 and performing the normal chart normal process transition setting process 1, the normal chart normal process is terminated. The normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 performs a process for repeating the normal figure normal process next time, and will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (step B41; NO), the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reservations 1) and the design random number storage area per number of the symbols (for the number of reservations 1) ) Are loaded (step B42), and thereafter, the random number storage area for each ordinary figure (for holding number 1) and the symbol random number storage area for each ordinary figure (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B43). Proceed to B44.
In step B44, it is determined whether the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is high in normal map, that is, the short-time state (normal power support state) (step B44). ). In the present embodiment, the ordinary power support state is in a high probability of ordinary figure, and the special figure is also in a high probability state (high probability mode). In the present embodiment, the normal game state when the normal game state is the normal state (the special control such as a high probability of hitting the general map is not performed, that is, the normal time when the normal power support state is not set). The hit probability is zero (for example, 0/251), and the hit probability of the normal figure in the normal power support state is, for example, 250/251, which is a probability setting with a large difference between the normal state and the high probability state. . Thereby, it is possible to increase the appeal by increasing the attractiveness of being in a high-probability state (that is, probability change) for the player while suppressing the appearance of balls in the normal state.

If it is not normally high probability (step B44; NO), a low probability lower limit determination value (for example, “251”) is set (step B45), and it is determined whether or not the loaded hit random number is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit determination value. (Step B47). On the other hand, when the normal probability is high (step B44; Y), a high probability lower limit determination value (eg, “1”) is set (step B46), and the loaded hit random number is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit determination value. (Step B47). Note that the upper limit determination value is a common value at the time of normal probability (ordinary power support state) and at normal time (normal state of normal diagram), and is, for example, “251”.
If the loaded hit random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B47; N), it is determined whether the loaded hit random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48).
Since the case where the loaded hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B47; Y) and the case where the loaded hit random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48; Y), it is not normal. , The deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), the deviation stop symbol number is set (step B50), and the error symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal figure stop symbol information area (step B50). B51), the process proceeds to step B55.

  If the loaded hit random number is not less than the set lower limit judgment value (step B48; N), since it is per common figure, hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B52), and the loaded hit design random number is set. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (step B53), the stop symbol information corresponding to this stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information storage area (step B54), and the process proceeds to step B55. In the present embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols for ordinary drawings.

Next, when proceeding to step B55, the set stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol region (step B55), and the set stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data region (step B56). The normal figure change time corresponding to the figure game mode state (for example, normal time: 700 ms, during normal power support: 500 ms (short due to short time)) is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B57).
Next, the random number storage area per common figure is shifted (step B58), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B59), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B60). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, after passing through step B60, the normal figure changing process transition setting process (step B61) is performed, and the normal figure normal process is ended.
When the normal game state is the normal state (in this embodiment, the special game state is also the normal state (low probability state)), the above-described upper limit determination value and lower limit determination value are both “251”, for example. Since the values are the same, in the determination processing in steps B47 and B48, the process always proceeds to step B49, and the probability per ordinary figure in the normal state in this embodiment is zero.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B62) in the above normal figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the usual figure normal process) is set as a process number for shifting to the usual figure normal process in step B71, and the ordinary figure game process number area is processed in step B72. Save the number (here "0"). Next, in step B73, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, the normal process is shifted to the normal processing next time.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for changing the normal map (step B61) in the normal process for the normal map described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the process of changing the normal map) is set in step B81, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the normal game process number area in step B82. Save. Next, in step B83, a signal related to the start of normal variation (for example, the normal symbol 1 variation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data region, and in step B84, the variation flag is saved in the general variation control flag region. Next, in step B85, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal display (the general display LED of the collective display device 35), is saved in the normal flashing control timer area. Then, the process transition setting process during normal map change is terminated. As a result, the process shifts to the normal map change process next time.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When the routine is started, a process for setting a transition to a normal map display process is performed in step B91. This is a setting for shifting to the normal map display processing, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process transition setting process (step B91) in the above-described normal map change process will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the process number related to the process for displaying the normal map) is set as a process number in Step B101, and the process number (here, “2”) is set in the process for the normal game process number in Step B102. Save. Next, in step B103, the normal figure display time (eg, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step B105, a signal relating to the end of the normal figure change (eg, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned off) is output as a test signal. Save to the data area. Next, in step B106, the stop flag is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area and the process returns. As a result, the process moves to the normal map display process next time.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying a normal map, first, a process of loading a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal map normal process (step B111) and clearing the RWM hit flag area (step B112) is performed. Do.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit (step B113). If it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step B113; NO), the process branches to step B122, and the normal processing transition setting process 1 is performed. (Description with FIG. 72) is performed, and the process for displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is a win (step B113; YES), a process (step B114) for determining whether or not the normal power support is being performed (during the time reduction state) is performed.
If the power transmission support is in progress (step B114; YES), the hit processing setting table is set (step B115), and the hit start pointer value (initial value of control pointer, details) corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is set. Is acquired in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B116), and the open time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general map stop symbol information is acquired. Is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B117), a normal process transition setting process (step B121) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the normal power support is not being performed (step B114; NO), a normal start hit value (initial value of the control pointer) is set and saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step S114). B119), a normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) is set and saved in the normal game process timer area (step B120), and the normal normal process transition setting process 1 in FIG. 72 is performed. (Step B122), the process for displaying the normal map is terminated.

In addition, the specific example (specific example of a common power release pattern) of the general electric operation timing chart in this embodiment is shown in the lower part of FIG. In the case of this specific example, there are three types of hit symbols: “hit symbol 1”, “hit symbol 2”, and “hit symbol 3”.
When the winning symbol 1 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after a normal display time of 600 ms (the time set in step B104), 500 ms (set in step B117). Is a one-time open electric power release pattern provided with a 600 electric power remaining ball processing time (time set in step B158 described later). .

Next, when the winning symbol 2 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after passing the display time of the normal time of 600 ms, the normal time of 1700 ms (the normal power open time set in the step B117) is passed. The power is released, and after a 200 ms wait time (the time set in Step B152 described later), the second 1700 ms of the main power is released, and then the 600 ms of the remaining power processing time is set for 600 ms. It will be a two-time open electric train opening pattern.
Next, when the winning symbol 3 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after a normal display time of 600 ms, a normal power release of 1700 ms is performed, and then a wait time of 200 ms is set. After that, the 2nd 1700ms of public power was released, followed by a 200ms wait time, the 3rd time of 1700ms of public power was released, and then the 3rd time of 600ms. It will be an open electric train opening pattern.

  Further, in this embodiment, although not shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, a common figure occurs during the support of ordinary electric power (during high probability), but the common figure (general figure hold) is normal. When the power release time is not during normal power support (normal state) (that is, when the process proceeds to step B119 via step B114), the normal power release pattern is It is configured to be opened once (that is, the opening time of the opening operation of the symbol 1 is shortened) for 100 ms (the normal power opening time set in step B120). This is related to the configuration of this embodiment in which the probability per universal figure is set to zero when the normal gaming state is the normal state. In other words, in this embodiment, when the normal game state is the normal state, by setting the probability per normal figure to zero, the advantage of the general power support state is relatively improved, and The expectation for the support state (in this example, it is also a special figure high probability state) is raised and the interest is improved. In addition, as an opening pattern of the start area opening / closing means (that is, an opening pattern for ordinary electric trains), an opening pattern when the usual gaming state is the support state (for example, the one shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78) In addition, a special opening pattern (100 ms × 1) when the usual gaming state is the normal state is provided. Thereby, there is an effect of preventing an unexpected number of winnings from being generated in a normal state where it is not desired to win a prize (game design goes wrong). The reason for this is that the normal pattern does not win (the probability per universal figure is zero). Since the time is extended or the number of times of opening is increased, a considerable number of unexpected start prizes occur in a normal state where it is not desired to win a prize, and the game design becomes crazy. However, if there is a dedicated public power release pattern in the normal state, the above-mentioned unexpected start winning can be suppressed or avoided by setting a difficult-to-win specification as this dedicated public power release pattern. I can.

In this embodiment, in order to realize a total of four types of normal power release operations as described above, a control pointer for general power release control (intermediate processing control pointer per general diagram) shown in the lower chart of FIG. As shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78 in each release pattern, the value of this control pointer has a value corresponding to each time when the open / close state changes after the end of the first release operation. It is going to change.
The hit start pointer value in steps B116 and B119 means the first value (initial value) of such a control pointer value. Therefore, in the case of the specific example shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, in step B116, “4” is the case of winning symbol 1, “2” is the winning symbol 2, and “0” is the winning symbol 3. Is saved as the starting pointer value per hit. In step B119, as in the case of winning symbol 1, “4” is saved as the winning start pointer value.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map process (step B121) in the process for displaying the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “3” (corresponding to the process number related to the normal process per ordinary figure) is set in step B131, and the process number (here, “3”) is set in the usual game process number area in step B132. Save. Next, in step B133, a test signal output data includes a signal related to the start of the normal figure (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 is in operation) Save to area. Next, in step B134, ON data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area, and in step B135, the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 is cleared. In the monitoring period, the normal power fraud winning number area for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning apparatus 26 is cleared. Save outside the period) and return. As a result, the next time, the routine shifts to the normal processing.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit processing (step B12) in the above-described normal game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the middle processing per map, first, the processing control pointer per base map is loaded and prepared (step B141), and then the value of the loaded control pointer per base map is set in the middle control pointer upper limit value area per base map. It is determined whether or not a value (value of hit end: for example, “4” or the like) has been reached (step B142).
If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B142; NO), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B143), A normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed, and the process during the normal map is terminated.
Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B142; YES), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B143. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the normal power operation transition setting process (step B144) in the above-described normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that a hit processing time value table, which is a specific example shown in the middle part of FIG. The hit processing time value table is in the hit processing setting table set in step B115 in the normal map display processing. As shown in the middle of FIG. 78, the hit processing time value table includes the value of the control pointer and the normal power operation (normal power release or general power blockage) after each time point during the normal power operation to which the value corresponds. The duration value is recorded in association with each other. The middle hit processing time value table in the middle part of FIG. 78 controls the normal power release pattern corresponding to the hit symbol 3 shown in the lower chart (normal power operation timing chart) of FIG. In step B152 and step B154, which will be described later, the time corresponding to the value of the control pointer is saved with reference to such a hit processing time value table.

The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 26, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, branching is performed using a control pointer in step B151. Here, the process branches according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B141. Specifically, if the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B152 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 26, so that the normal variation corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after the winning device 26 is closed (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B152), and the off-data is output to the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 132 in step B153. Is set, and the normal operation transition setting process is terminated. As a result, the closing time after the normal variation winning device 26 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal variation winning device 26 is blocked during this period.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is one of 1 and 3 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 26, so that the normal variation winning device 26 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (1700 ms, for example) is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B154), and in order to turn on the general power solenoid 132 in step B155, the on-data is output to the general power solenoid output data area. Is set, and the normal operation transition setting process is terminated. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned normal power opening time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is opened during this period.

  If the value of the control pointer is 4 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 26 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13). “4” is set as the number (step B156). Next, in step B157, the process number (here, “4”) is saved in the usual game process number area. Next, in Step B158, the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area, and then in Step B159, off data is set in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 132. Save and end the normal operation transition setting process.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B161, an end process transition setting process is performed. This is a setting for shifting to a normal hit end process, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal figure end process transition setting process (step B161) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When the routine is started, “5” (corresponding to the processing number related to the end processing per ordinary figure) is set in step B171, and the processing number (here, “5”) is set in the ordinary game processing number area in step B172. Save. Next, in step B173, the normal ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area, and in step B174, a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 26 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B175, the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the control pointer area during the normal map is cleared, and the normal process end process transition setting process ends. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the end process for each figure.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When the routine is started, a normal process transition setting process 2 is performed in step B181. This is a setting for shifting to normal processing, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B181) in the above-mentioned normal figure end process will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B191, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the normal routine process) is set, and in step B192, the process number (here, “0”) is set in the general game process number area. Save. Next, in step B193, a signal related to the end of the normal symbol (for example, the normal signal per symbol 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, a fraud monitoring period flag (a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 26) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, next time, the routine shifts to normal processing.

The flowchart related to the general game process has been described above. Next, a description will be given of a subroutine after step S80 in the above-described timer interrupt process.
Here, description will be made using “step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing processing]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LED provided in the collective display device 35. As described above, the collective display device 35 displays the ordinary map, the special figure, and the special figure and the ordinary figure. The start memory hold display (special figure hold display, general figure hold display) and the game state display are performed.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) using LEDs as light emission sources. More specifically, for example, special figure 1 hold indicator, special figure 2 hold indicator, universal figure hold indicator, first game state display part, second game state display part, error display part, round display part, etc. The segment LED editing process includes segment LEDs having functions, and performs settings related to their drive.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step C1), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step C2). This determination is made based on whether or not the specific bit of the timer is 1. In this example, a blinking cycle of 128 ms is created by looking at bit 5.
If it is the output ON timing (step C2; Y), the general-purpose hold number display table 1 is set (step C3), and the process proceeds to step C5. If it is not the output on timing (step C2; N), the common figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C4), and the process proceeds to step C5.
Note that if the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same regardless of which table is used as the usual figure hold number display table.

In step C5, display data corresponding to the number of pending maps is acquired based on the set number of pending maps display table 1 or 2, saved in the segment area (step C5), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing. (Step C6). When it is the output ON timing (step C6; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C7), and the process proceeds to step C9. If it is not the output on timing (step C6; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C8), and the process proceeds to step C9.
Note that by saving display data in a predetermined segment area, the corresponding LEDs of the collective display device 35 are turned on or off.

  In step C9, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is acquired on the basis of the set special figure 1 holding number display table 1 or 2, and saved in the segment area (step C9). (Step C10). If it is the output on timing (step C10; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C11), and the process proceeds to step C13. If it is not the output on timing (step C10; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

At step C13, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area (step C13), and a round display table is set. Then, display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired from this table and saved in the segment area (step C15).
Next, the game state display table 1 is set (step C16), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired from this table, and saved in the segment area (step C17). In the game state display, it is informed whether or not the special figure is being shortened (during normal power support). For example, it is performed with one LED, and the light is turned off to indicate a normal state, and the lighted state represents a short time during special drawing (medium power support).
Next, the game state display table 2 is set (step C18), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C19), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. The game state display 2 notifies whether or not the game state is a right-handed game state. For example, it is performed with one LED, and when it is turned off, it indicates normal strike (left strike), and when it is turned on, it represents right strike. In the case of this example, as described above, the right-handed period is during the big hit, during the small hit, and during the power transmission support.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and fraud notification is set to start or end.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2), the magnetic sensor 126 is turned on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected. Is determined (step C21).
When the magnetic sensor 126 is on (step C21; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step C22), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step C23).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer is up (step C23; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C25). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C26), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, a period of eight interruptions, that is, an interruption period of 4 ms × 8 = 32 ms), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Yes.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C23; NO), it transfers to the process of step C29.

When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step C31). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C33).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C33; YES), the command for the state is already transmitted to the effect control device 300, and thus the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region (step C34), and the production command setting is performed to send the command about the state to the production control device 300. The process is performed (step C35), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, in FIG. 82, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) when there is no magnet fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the process route of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33, RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The board radio wave fraud monitoring process determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 127, and sets the start or end of fraud notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 127 is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 163. That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C41). When the radio wave sensor is on (step C41; YES), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C42).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step C43), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step C49). That is, unlike the case of the magnet fraud, the radio wave fraud is determined to be abnormal when the abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step C41; NO), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 (step S41). C45). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the period of the unauthorized notification ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step C47), a radio fraud release flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step C48), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag region. (Step C49).

If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step C49; YES), the command for the state has already been transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. . If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C50), and the production command is sent to the production control device 300 to send a command about the state. A setting process is performed (step C51), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, the arrows in FIG. 83 indicate the processing route (normal route) when there is no radio wave fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the process route of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, and RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S74), the prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S77), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) are displayed. Based on this, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the external information editing process, first, at step C61, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error has occurred. In this process, the determination based on the monitoring result in the “game machine state check process” in FIG. 20 is not directly monitored based on the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 211. I do. That is, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the “gaming machine state check process” of FIG.
If the glass frame opening error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step C62 to determine whether or not a front frame (main body frame) opening error has occurred. Also in this process, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the “gaming machine state check process” in FIG.

If a front frame (main body frame) release error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65. If the glass frame opening error is occurring in step C61, the process proceeds to step C65.
That is, if a glass frame open error or front frame open error has occurred, the process proceeds to step C65, where the ON data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C65, and then the game is played in step C66. The ON data of the machine error state signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to Step C67.
On the other hand, if the front frame (body frame) opening error is not occurring (step C62; N), the process proceeds to step C63, where the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C63. In step S67, the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area.

  In step C67, if the security signal control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C67), and then it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer has become 0 (step C68). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. The security signal control timer is a timer whose initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S29 of the main process. When the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, the security signal is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) at the shortest. It is for output.

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 in step C68, that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already expired in step C68 or has expired after "-1" update, the process proceeds to step C70 and thereafter.

  Proceeding to step C70, in steps C70, 71, 72, 73, 74, whether a magnet fraud has occurred, a board radio wave fraud has occurred, a frame radio wave fraud has occurred, a general electric power fraud has occurred, or a big prize opening fraud has occurred Each is determined. In these processes, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the “game machine state check process” in FIG. That is, whether or not each of the above frauds is occurring is determined based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the “gaming machine state check process” of FIG. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the fraud is occurring based on a fraud flag area (magnet fraud flag area, panel radio wave fraud flag area) saved in the fraud monitoring process of FIGS.

If any one or more frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C78 to save the security signal on data in the external information output data area, and in step C79, the game machine error status signal on data is converted to the test signal. Save to the output data area and proceed to Step C80. As a result, fraud and gaming machine error states are output to the outside.
In this example, since the security signal is turned on at step C78 in addition to step C69, the security signal is not turned off unless the security signal control timer expires and no error occurs. That is, when the security signal control timer has expired and no error has occurred, the security signal is turned off due to the processing of step C64.

  On the other hand, if NO in step C70, NO in step C71, NO in step C72, NO in step C73, NO in step C74, that is, NO in steps C70 to C74, the process branches from step C74 to step C75. After the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, the process proceeds to step C80.

In step C80, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and then a start opening signal editing process (step C81) for editing a winning signal of the start opening is performed. . Subsequently, if the symbol determination count control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C82), and then it is determined whether the symbol determination count control timer value is 0 (time is up) (step C83). ). The symbol determination frequency control timer is a timer for controlling the on time of the symbol determination frequency signal.
If the symbol determination count control timer has not expired (step C83; NO), the process proceeds to step C85 to save the symbol determination count signal ON data in the external information output data area and return. When the routine is repeated and it is determined in step C83 that the symbol determination count control timer has timed up (step C83; YES), the process proceeds to step C84, where the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. End the external information editing process.
In this way, every time the symbol of the special symbol finishes changing, the symbol determination number signal is output as external information.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs updated in step S160 is 0 (step C103).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step C103; NO), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area outputs the main prize ball signal output count. The control timer initial value is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step C103; YES), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106; YES), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C106; NO), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
In this way, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal of one pulse for every ten award balls to be paid out to an external device (for example, a game store management device). Note that the payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, a management device).
That is, the game control device 100 (main board) updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for each 10 payout schedule (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then updates ( The main award ball number signal is output for the number of output times set). Then, in response to the main award ball signal output for every 10 payout schedules as described above, the award ball signal is transmitted when 10 payouts are actually made from the payout control device 200 (payout board). By matching the schedule and the result, it is possible to cope with illegal payout.

In addition, it becomes possible to determine when a winning has occurred from the main prize ball signal by a management device or the like as an external device, which helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a winning occurs during a big hit or a winning that occurs during a normal game. For example, it is not strange to win a lot of prizes during a big hit, but if there are a lot of prizes during normal games, it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device, but only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the payout is performed because the ball has run out during the big hit. In other words, it is impossible to determine when a winning has occurred when, for example, when the replenishment is delayed after the jackpot is over.
For this reason, if the replenishment is delayed after the end of the jackpot, there will be a large number of winnings (payouts) during normal games, which may lead to inadequacies in sales data. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used together, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize. The problem disappears.

Further, the ON / OFF pattern of the main prize ball signal generated by the main prize ball signal editing process is, for example, as shown in the timing chart shown in the lower part of FIG. That is, the pattern is composed of an on-state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and an off-state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms). Here, since the value of the output control timer represents the timer interrupt period of 4 ms as one unit, “48” corresponds to 192 ms and “16” corresponds to 64 ms.
A start port signal generated by a start port signal editing process described later also has the same pattern as the main prize ball signal.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step C81) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). If the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the start port signal output count updated in step S382 is 0 (step C113).

If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step C113; NO), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step C114), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C113; YES), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step C112; NO), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116; YES), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C116; NO), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 129.
Here, “step D” is used as the step number.
The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special drawing in the description of the control process of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for this production. (Decoration that is not this special figure).

Further, in general, a “character” means a character or an animal having a property or character, or a property or character, and a computer term may mean a character. However, in the description of the effect control device 300 below, particularly in the case of the description of the image display control using VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of special patterns (special design decorative pattern and fourth pattern), characters of characters, etc. A grouped still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, an object means a display control target that is coherent in the case of display control, and includes display elements (background image, special design decorative image, notice character image). , A grouped image such as a hold display image). For example, in the case of this example, there is a distinction in the decorative design of the special design by the difference in the variable display area (reel) of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and each of these distinctions has the current design, the next design, There is a distinction that the display position in the scroll direction is different from the previous symbol. That is, for example, for the left symbol, there are the current symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the symbol of the previous symbol of the left symbol. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

Further, in this embodiment, a scenario table (also referred to as a scenario data table) is used when performing an effect on the display device 41 or the like. In this scenario table, data for controlling the flow of a specific performance (data specifying which motion table is to be executed at what timing) is set.
The above motion table has motion data (that is, data for specifying image data to be displayed and its display position) for each effect (mainly effect display) that has been made into blocks (parts). This means a directed production operation. That is, the motion table is a control table for executing each effect produced in blocks, and is also referred to as a motion control table. The data of the motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like with commercially available application software that can be executed on a PC (personal computer). Pre-stored in the PROM 321.

In this embodiment, the concept of a scenario layer is used in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display device 41. A scenario layer means each layer in the system which controls production display etc. divided into a plurality of layers. In this example, a scenario table is set as necessary for each scenario layer, and the overall effect is realized by synthesizing the effects of each scenario layer.
The “scenario management area” is a storage area having a structure including a scenario timer value storage area (scenario timer area) and a scenario table address storage area (scenario data table area). is there. And, there are scenario management areas of the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer, and in this example, there are 8 scenario layers, so there are also 8 scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .
The “address area of the scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the scenario management area.

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
This main process starts when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started, the interrupt is first prohibited in step D1, the CPU 311 is initially set in step D2, the VDP 312 is initially set in step D3, and the interrupt is then set in step D4. To give permission. Next, after steps D13, D15, and D19 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D20.

In step D13, display data generation is permitted. This is a process for permitting a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM 329 and generate display data.
In step D15, a random number seed is set. This is processing for setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine is used. Also good.
In step D19, power is turned on to an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control apparatus 300)) in an RWM (for example, RAM 326) of the effect control apparatus 300. Save the initial value of the hour.

Next, when proceeding to step D20, steps D20 to D32 are sequentially executed.
In step D20, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
In step D21, an effect button input process is executed. This is a process of performing editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) or the touch panel 9a is operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the process for detecting the input of the button may be performed in this process (that is, in a main loop process to be described later), or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). You may go.

In step D22, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and display device 41, and changes of brightness and volume of the LED and display device 41 by the player. .
In step D23, random number update processing is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process by using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control apparatus 100).
In step D24, a received command check process (described later) is executed.
In step D28, scenario setting processing is executed. This is a process for analyzing a scenario based on the received command from the game control apparatus 100 (details will be described later).
In step D30, a motion control process is executed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28 (details will be described later).

In step D31, an effect display editing process is executed. This is a process for setting various commands for instructing the drawing contents on the display device 41 to the VDP 312 and parameters thereof, which will be described in detail later. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructed to draw a screen) described later.
In step D32, the drawing command preparation end setting is executed, and the process proceeds to step D33. The process in step D32 is a process for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

  In step D33, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing. If it is the frame switching timing, steps D34 to D38 are sequentially executed. If it is not the frame switching timing, this step D33 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sink interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs every time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds as described above. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, the frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a period of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  Subsequent processes (steps D34 to D38 and subsequent steps D20 to D32) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle by the process of step D33. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

Next, in step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D35, a sound control process for performing a process related to the volume of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 12a and lower speaker 12b) is executed.
In step D36, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs of the panel decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43 is executed.
In step D37, a movable body control process for controlling movable bodies including various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
In step D38, a firing information control process is executed. In the launch information control process, launch related information (to be described later) is set based on the launch state flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of balls)) The mode of the effect is corrected according to. Here, the firing state flag is information indicating whether or not the player is firing a game ball, and the firing touch information received from the game control device 100 in the firing touch information setting process (step D233) described later. This information is saved in the firing state flag area based on a command for informing the user.
After executing Step D38, the process returns to Step D20, and the same processing as when the process proceeds to Step D20 is repeated. That is, Step D20 to Step D38 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed at the above-described processing cycle after the production control device 300 is activated.

  Note that the control processing in steps D35 to D37 is performed in these steps in which the operation is switched in units of processing cycles in order to match the presentation of the screen, but the signals generated or set by these control processing and The process of actually outputting data (especially signals for controlling driving of various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step D24) in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG. The command from the main board includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a “command reception interrupt process” (not shown). In other words, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of the command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to retrieve from the buffer, but in the above “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer and the loaded command data is checked for abnormalities. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by 1 by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “storing” means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read out for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 326, the same applies hereinafter) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer only needs to be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

When the received command check processing routine is started, first, in step D151, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the command reception number. Then, in step D152, it is determined whether the command reception number is not zero. After sequentially executing D153 to D155, the process proceeds to step D156, and if zero, the process returns. In the present application, as in step D151 described above, “loading” data in the control process means that data is extracted from the RAM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a in the effect control apparatus 300 of this example).
Further, the command reception counter is subtracted at step D153 next to this routine executed at each frame switching timing and basically cleared to 0, so that the result is 1 frame (1/30 second) (as described above). The number of commands received during one processing cycle) is counted, and is constituted by the command reception counter area of the RWM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a).

In step D153, the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions.
Assuming that A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after execution of step D151. The normal movement is “A = A−B = 0” immediately after execution of step D153, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device interrupts the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A is increased between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. Therefore, if the process of step D153 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted. Is going. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. By doing so, the processing content of step D153 may be set to “A ← 0”.

In step D154, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer and may be simply referred to as the command buffer hereinafter) (that is, command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer) are stored in the command area (case To the command storage area). The command area is a storage area in, for example, the RAM 326 or the RAM 311a that constitutes a buffer in a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format).
In step D155, since the data in the command buffer has been read, an update is performed to increase the value of the command read index, which is a command buffer read pointer, by 1 in the range of 0 to 31, for example. The range of 0 to 31 here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, 32).

  Proceeding to step D156, it is determined whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D154 and D155 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). Returning to step D154, the process is repeated from step D154. If completed, the process proceeds to step D157.

Proceeding to step D157, the contents of the command area (the data stored first in the data not yet read out of the command area, that is, the data to be read out next) are loaded (ie, read out), With respect to the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command), a received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D158, and then the process proceeds to step D159.
In step D159, the address of the command area (address of data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D160, it is determined whether or not analysis of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D157 to D159 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). If not completed, the process returns to step D157. The process is repeated from step D157, and if completed, the process returns.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D158) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored separately in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D172. . In the case of a fluctuation-type command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. Is.

In steps D172 and D173, it is determined whether the MODE value and the ACT value separated in step D171 are in the normal range, respectively. If only one of these values is not in the normal range, the process returns. If so, the process proceeds to step D174. Some values of MODE are not defined and are not used. When these values are not used, it is determined in step D172 that they are not in the normal range.
In step D173, whether or not the ACT value separated in step D171 is within the normal range is determined as follows, for example. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of this ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown). It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that it is within the normal range (the missing tooth check has not been performed at this time).

Proceeding to step D174, it is determined whether or not the separated ACT value with respect to the separated MODE value is a correct combination. This determination is performed using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it is determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It is determined that it is not a combination.
In the process of step D174, a check (including a missing tooth check) is performed to determine whether the ACT combination is normal for MODE. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but these values are not always continuous (ie, there are values that do not exist discontinuously, values that are missing). It is confirmed whether or not is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if it matches any of them.
If the determination result in step D174 is NO, the value of ACT is abnormal, so that the command is abnormal and the process returns without executing step D175 and subsequent steps. When the determination result of this step D174 becomes YES, it progresses to step D175.

In step D175, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. If it is within this range, a variable command process (described later) is executed in step D176, and the process returns. If it is outside this range, the process returns to step D177. move on. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D171 (the same applies to step D177 described later). A fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is the fluctuation command range.
In step D177, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. If it is within this range, the jackpot command processing (details omitted) is executed in step D178 and the process returns. Proceed to step D179. The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that can be taken by the data of the jackpot command is the jackpot command range.

In step D179, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. If it is within this range, symbol system command processing (described later) is executed in step D180, and the process returns. Proceed to D181. The symbol system command (sometimes referred to as symbol command or decorative special symbol command) is a command for instructing information relating to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to stop symbol of special symbol). The range that the data can take is the symbol-type command range.
In step D181, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. If it is within this range, single-shot command processing (described later) is executed in step D182 and the process returns. move on. Unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single command (sometimes referred to as single command) includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the single command data can take is the single command range.

Proceeding to step D183, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol system command range for pre-reading effect. If it is out of this range, the process proceeds to step D185.
Proceeding to step D185, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-reading variation command range for the pre-reading effect. If it is out of this range, the received command analysis process is terminated and the process returns.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as a pre-reading notice or a pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory in which a special display variable display game is not executed (the start winning memory is held or simply held). In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not the game will be a big hit when the game is executed, the start prize memory is displayed in a different manner than usual. Etc. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the variation pattern and stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the prefetch effect. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Single command processing]
Next, details of the single command processing executed in step D176 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D201, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (upper byte data separated in the above-mentioned step D171, and so on) is data for model designation (model designation command data). If the model is to be specified, the model setting process (not described) is executed in step D202, and then the process returns (the single command processing ends). If the model is not specified, the process proceeds to step D203.

  In step D203, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is RAM initialization (power-on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on) (RAM initialization command data). If it is to inform the initialization, the process returns after executing the RAM initialization setting process in step D204, and if not to instruct the RAM initialization, the process proceeds to step D205. Note that the RAM initialization command is a command (also referred to as a power-on command) that informs the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM, and is transmitted in step S30 described above. This RAM initialization command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform RWM clear notification (for example, an operation to display that the RWM is cleared on the display device 41). The process is the RAM initialization setting process in step D204.

Proceeding to step D205, it is determined whether the MODE data is information indicating power failure recovery (command data at the time of power failure recovery), and if power failure recovery is notified, after executing power failure recovery setting processing at step D206. Return to step D207 if the power failure recovery command is not issued. The power failure recovery setting process in step D206 is for displaying, for example, a message such as “Game restarted” on the display device 41 or informing the player of power failure recovery by blinking lamps in a predetermined manner. And includes scenario data setting processing for that purpose.
As will be described in detail later, the scenario data setting process will be executed in the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is a process of setting scenario control data for production. The scenario control data is data set in the above-described scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area (for example, a scenario data table written in the scenario management area (scenario) Table) address).

When the process proceeds to step D207, it is determined whether the MODE data is data for instructing a customer waiting demo (data for a customer waiting demo command). If the data is for instructing a customer waiting demo, steps D208 and D210 are sequentially executed. Returning to step D211, if not waiting for a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration is a customer waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect) and includes an effect including a customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41. The customer-waiting demonstration effect is not limited to display on the display device 41, but may be effected by display on another display device, lighting of lamps (including blinking), or sound output.
In step D208, a customer waiting demo setting process (details will be described later) for setting scenario control data for performing a customer waiting effect is executed.
Next, in step D210, an accessory position confirmation process (not shown) is executed, and then the process returns.

Proceeding to step D211, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates the special figure 1 hold number value (data of the special figure 1 hold number command), and if the special figure 1 hold number value is notified. If not, the process proceeds to step D212.
Proceeding to step D212, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings in FIG. 1 (the number of starting memories in FIG. 1) has increased by one based on the MODE data. After updating the number by +1, the process proceeds to step D214, and if not increased, the process proceeds to step D214 without executing step D213. In step D214, the process returns after executing the special figure 1 hold information setting process (not described). Note that the number of received start opening prize commands is also updated by +1 in steps D217 and D220, which will be described later, and therefore any of the start winning openings (Special Figure 1 start opening 607, Special Figure 2 start opening 608, Start winning opening 26a). Corresponds to the number of game balls entered (that is, the number of start winnings), and is used to determine the special figure rotation state in the launch information control process of step D38.

Proceeding to step D215, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates the special figure 2 hold number value (data of the special figure 2 hold number command), and if the special figure 2 hold number value is notified. If not, the process proceeds to step D216, and if it does not notify the value of the special figure 2 holding number, the process proceeds to step D219.
Proceeding to step D216, based on the MODE data, it is determined whether or not the number of suspensions of special figure 2 (the number of starting memories of special figure 2) has increased by one, and if it has increased, reception of a start opening prize command is received at step D217 After updating the number by +1, the process proceeds to step D218, and if not increased, the process proceeds to step D218 without executing step D217. In step D218, the process returns after executing the special figure 2 hold information setting process (not described).
In order to simplify the explanation, in steps D213 and D217, the winning balls at the first starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 607) and the second starting port (Special Figure 2 starting port 608, start winning prize opening 26a). The common start opening command reception number area is incremented by 1 with the same number, but the areas may be divided as different numbers of prize balls. In that case, the launch information control process in step D38 also changes accordingly.

  Proceeding to step D219, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for notifying the start opening over winning (data of the starting opening over winning command prepared in step S399 described above). For example, after updating the start opening prize command reception number by 1 in step D220, the process proceeds to step D221. In step D221, after starting port over winning setting processing (description is omitted), the process returns. Note that the start opening over winning means a starting winning exceeding the upper limit value of the special figure holding number (starting memory number).

Proceeding to step D222, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is information that reports probability information (data of probability variation information command). If the data is information that reports probability information, the process returns after executing probability information setting processing at step D223. If the probability information is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D224.
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for switching the screen at the time of the end of probability change (when transitioning from a high probability state to a low probability normal state) when a probability change occurs after a big hit, and a scenario for that Data setting processing may be included.
Proceeding to step D224, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is an error / invalidity notification data (for example, error notification command data). After executing (Omitted), the process returns.

  Proceeding to step D226, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding effect mode switching (data for effect mode switching command). If effect mode switching is instructed, effect mode switching setting processing is performed at step D227. After executing (details omitted), the process returns, and if the instruction mode switching is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D228. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching command, and includes a scenario data setting process.

Proceeding to step D228, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for a special symbol design stop command (ie, a symbol stop command), and if it is a special design command stop command, the procedure proceeds to step D229. If it is not an instruction to stop the special symbol, the process proceeds to step D232.
In step D229, it is determined whether the command corresponding to the MODE data is a normal command. If not normal, the process returns. If normal, the process returns after executing steps D230 and D231.
In step D230, stop setting of the corresponding special figure (of special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicated by the data of the symbol stop command) is executed.
In step D231, the normal state is set as the contents of the game state flag (information indicating the state of the gaming machine (P machine state)). Here, the normal state indicates that the special figure is not in the big hit, the special figure in the small hit, the special figure is changing, or the customer is waiting (customer waiting state). Further, after the normal setting is made here, for example, the special figure is changing or the customer is waiting in accordance with the next command from the main board.

Proceeding to step D232, the MODE data informs the firing touch information (the state off command or the state on command (hereinafter referred to as the firing command) relating to the touch switch signal prepared in step S304 or S307 described above and transmitted in step S317). If it is to inform the firing touch information, it returns after executing the firing touch information setting process in step D233, and proceeds to step D234 if it does not inform the firing touch information. .
In the launch touch information setting process, the launch state flag is set to indicate the launch state (whether or not the player is in contact with the launch operation handle 11) according to the received launch command data. And so on. That is, in the firing touch information setting process, it is determined whether the received MODE data is a normal touch-on command (a state-on command prepared in step S307 for the touch switch signal and transmitted to the effect control device 300). If it is a normal touch-on command, a firing flag is prepared, and if it is normal but not a touch-on command, a touch-off command (a touch switch signal is prepared in step S304 and transmitted to the effect control device 300). Status off command), if the flag for the firing stop is prepared, and the flag data thus prepared is different from the data already saved in the firing status flag area, the prepared flag data is stored in the firing status flag area. Perform processing such as saving.

Proceeding to step D234, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates that the ball lending button has been pressed (the data of the ball lending button pressing command prepared in step S298 described above and transmitted in step S299). Is returned after executing a ball lending information setting process (described later) in step D235, and returns if not informing that the ball lending button has been pressed.
This single-shot command processing includes steps that are not shown or described. For example, the corresponding processing when other commands of the non-variable system are received is omitted. In addition, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error command indicating that the frame is open is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, so that the scenario control data is not set.

[Customer waiting demonstration setting process]
Next, the customer waiting demonstration setting process executed in step D208 of the single-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this customer waiting demonstration setting process, first, the process proceeds to step D241, where it is determined whether the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is normal.

Proceeding to step D242, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is in the customer waiting demo. If the customer waiting demo is in progress, the process returns. To do.
In step D243, a customer waiting scenario data setting process (described later) is executed to perform a customer waiting effect. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, scenario control data means data set in the scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In this step D243, scenario control data for performing a customer waiting effect is set.
In step D244, customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state. The customer waiting effects include a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (without sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

[Customer waiting scenario data setting process]
Next, the customer waiting scenario data setting process executed in step D243 of the customer waiting demo setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this customer waiting scenario data setting process, the process returns after executing steps D251 to D274 in sequence.
In step D251, scenario layer number 0 is prepared. Here, “preparing” means temporarily storing data in a predetermined storage area for subsequent processing (the same applies to other steps described later). The scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of performance. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and in this example, it is from 0 to 7. In this example, scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as scenario layer 0) is used mainly for display control of the background image, and scenario layer 1 is used for display control of the left design. The control target is basically assigned. However, only the scenario layer 0 is used for the customer waiting effect, and motion information such as symbols for the customer waiting effect is managed in the scenario layer 0.

In step D252, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table is prepared. A scenario data table (also simply called a scenario table) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific performance (data specifying which motion table is executed at what timing, etc.) is set. Each effect is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. The customer waiting scenario data table is a scenario table for a customer waiting effect, and has, for example, the configuration shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the scenario table of this example is one in which opcode and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row (each record).
In step D253, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the immediately preceding steps D251 and D252.

In step D254, scenario layer number 1 is prepared. In step D255, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D256, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D254 and D255.
In step D257, scenario layer number 2 is prepared. In step D258, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D259, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D257 and D258.

In step D260, scenario layer number 3 is prepared. In step D261, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D262, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D260 and D261.
In step D263, scenario layer number 4 is prepared. In step D264, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D265, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D263 and D264.

In step D266, scenario layer number 5 is prepared. In step D267, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D268, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D266 and D267.
In step D269, scenario layer number 6 is prepared. In step D270, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D271, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D269 and D270.

In step D272, scenario layer number 7 is prepared. In step D273, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D274, scenario data setting processing described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D272 and D273.
Note that scenario layers 1 to 7 for preparing addresses (NULL) in steps D255, D258, D261, D264, D267, D270, and D273 are scenario layers in which a scenario data table is not set, that is, uncontrolled scenario layers.

[Scenario data setting processing]
Next, the details of the scenario data setting process executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274 in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step of executing this scenario data setting process is another routine (for example, step D453 of reach start effect setting process described later). There are many. All steps described as “scenario data setting process” are shown in FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D281, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D252, D255, etc.) is NULL. If it is NULL, step D287 is executed. If it is not NULL, steps D282 to D286 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

  In the customer waiting scenario data setting process described above, when this routine is executed in step D253, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table which is not NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D252. The result of the determination is NO and steps D282 to D286 are executed. If this routine is executed in other steps D256, etc., NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D255, etc. The determination result of D281 is YES, and step D287 is executed.

  In step D282, the top address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D251, and so on) is set. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 of the effect control device 300 is configured to have a storage area for scenario management called “scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”. Of these, the scenario management area includes an area for storing a scenario timer value (scenario timer area), an area for storing a PB timer (push button timer) value (PB timer area), and PB detection. The structure includes an area (PB detection flag area) for storing the value of the flag (push button detection flag) and an area (scenario data table area) for storing the address of the scenario data table. Also, there are scenario management areas having the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer. In this example, there are 8 scenario layers, so there are also 8 scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). . In step D282, in order to specify one of the plurality of scenario management areas as described above, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding scenario management area) is set. doing.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, since there are eight scenario layers, the corresponding eight start addresses (scenarios) 8 addresses for storing (layer 0 address to scenario layer 7 address).
Next, in step D283, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D282 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

Next, in Step D284, 0 is written as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared).
Next, in step D285, 0 is written as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared). Note that the value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may be cleared, but it may be cleared when necessary (when PB detection is started), so the value of the PB detection flag is set here. Absent.
Next, in step D286, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, prepared in step D252) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area.
On the other hand, in step D287, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

According to the scenario data setting process described above, the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is to be executed for the future. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the customer waiting scenario data setting process described above, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274, so that the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is executed. The top address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the layer 0 address, and NULL is set from the remaining scenario layer 1 address to the scenario layer 7 address. The address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D252 is set in the scenario data table area of the scenario management area 0. As a result, the control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Ball rental information setting process]
Next, the ball lending information setting process executed in step D235 of the single-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this ball lending information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball lending button pressing command determined in step D234 is a normal command (step D361). If it is not a normal command (step D361; N), the ball lending information setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command is normal (step D361; Y), unit amount information is set based on the ball lending unit number information set in the ball lending unit number setting process (step D362), and the set unit amount information is set. Is added to the value of the ball lending usage amount information area (step D363), and the ball lending information setting process is terminated. The ball lending unit number setting process is a process executed in the hall / player setting mode process (step D22) in the hall setting mode. This is a process for realizing the setting change. The number of sphere lending units corresponds to an increase in the amount of rented balls due to a single lending operation for lending (a payout operation by a single depressing operation of the lending button 16). The hole setting mode is a mode that starts when a hole setting mode start condition is satisfied. The hall setting mode start condition includes an operation input to enter the hall setting mode (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 twice with the glass frame 5 opened), and a customer waiting demonstration is being performed. This condition is also included. That is, for example, when the production button 9 is pressed twice while the glass frame 5 is opened during the customer waiting demonstration, the hall setting mode start condition is established, and the above-mentioned ball rental unit number setting, volume setting by a hall clerk, etc. Is possible.

With the above processing, each time the player performs a ball lending operation (pressing the ball lending button) while the game is continuing, the amount of money used for lending the ball is increased by that amount (that is, the accumulated amount of the lending is performed). ).
Here, the ball lending unit number information is information corresponding to the amount information (unit amount information) used by pressing the ball lending button once (unit amount information from the information, unit amount information itself). May be). This ball lending unit number information corresponds to an increase in the amount of balls lent by a single lending operation. The registered value of the increase in the amount of rented balls (that is, information on the number of lent units) can be rewritten by the game store (hall) in the hall setting mode described above.

[Design command processing]
Next, details of the symbol system command processing executed in step D180 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D371, the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure corresponding to the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D171 described above, the same applies to step D372 described later)) is provided. 2 information) is set. For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. In this way, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be determined from the MODE data, and in this step D371, the special figure type is determined and set from the MODE data.

Next, in step D372, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved, and then the process returns (that is, the symbol command processing is terminated).
In step D372, specifically, a symbol type setting table corresponding to MODE data is first set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (for example, category such as outlier symbol, 16R probability variable big hit symbol, 2R probability variable big hit symbol, 11R normal variable big hit symbol,...) It is a table in which the correspondence relationship between symbol command ACTION data (for example, 11 types of 11h to 1Bh) and symbol types is defined. Since the proportions of symbols change between Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE. Select and set the one corresponding to the data.

Next, in step D372, based on the set symbol type setting table, the symbol type corresponding to the ACT data (lower byte data separated in step D171 described above) is acquired and saved as symbol type information.
The special symbol type and symbol type information set in steps D371 and D372 in response to the symbol command in this way will be described later with respect to a variable command that is a set received following the symbol command (or before the symbol command). Used in steps D401 and D402. Even if the special figure type information is used for the determination in step D401, the data previously set in step D371 is stored and held until step D371 is newly executed. In addition, the symbol type information is configured to store and hold data previously set in step D372 until step D372 is newly executed even after being used in step D402.
As described above, according to this routine, the special symbol type and the symbol type are set every time a symbol-related command is received.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing executed in step D176 in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D401 whether the special figure type is unconfirmed. If not, the process returns. If it is not unconfirmed (that is, the special figure type is set), step D402 is executed. To check the combination of the variation command and the symbol command, and proceed to Step D403. The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in the above-described step D371 of the symbol system command processing.

When the process proceeds to step D403, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent. If not, the process returns. If not, the process returns after executing steps D404 to D408.
Note that the symbol type means a symbol category. As described above, the symbol type includes, for example, a missing symbol, a 16R probability variation big hit symbol, and the like. Also, the inconsistency in step D403 is contradictory in producing effects such as when a symbol command of 16R probability variable big hit symbol is received after receiving a deviation variation command (variation pattern command). It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type). That is, in step D402, a consistency check is performed to determine whether the change pattern command matches the stop symbol, and the result branches in step D403.

In step D404, the variation pattern type (a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, which is determined by the variation pattern type data) is determined according to the received command.
In step D405, a variation effect setting process (described later) is executed in order to produce an effect according to the variation command.
Also, in step D406, the special figure is being changed as the P machine state (pachinko machine state). Here, during special map fluctuation, it means that special chart fluctuation is being displayed (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.).
In step D407, if the number of pre-read effects (the number of pre-read executions) is not zero, a process of updating the number of pre-read effects by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-read effects by 1) is executed. Here, the reason why the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 is that step D407 is executed when a valid variable command is received (from now on, the variation of the special figure is started, and the number of reserved start prize memories is one. This is because it is reduced. Note that the number of prefetch effects is set based on the latest hold information when a prefetch notice is performed in a prefetch lottery process (not shown) (subroutine called and executed in the prefetch variable command process in step D186). For example, if the number of holds is 4, the setting is 4 times, and if the number of holds is 3, the setting is 3 times. The number of pre-read effects is updated in step D407 and used in step D729b described later.
In step D408, the above-described special figure fluctuation count (the counter used in the launch information control process in step D38) is updated by +1. Since this step D408 is executed every time the special figure fluctuation display is started, the special figure fluctuation number for counting the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display is updated by +1 here. The number of special figure fluctuations updated here is used to determine the special figure rotation state in the firing information control process.

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, details of the changing effect setting process executed in step D405 in the above-described changing command process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type data determined in step D404 of the variable command processing is a variation without reach. If the variation is not reach, steps D422 and D423 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D426, and if there is no reach variation, the process proceeds to step D426 after sequentially executing steps D424 and D425.
In step D422, a first-half notice allocation group address table (not shown) corresponding to the launch-related information (to be described later), the model code, the special figure type, and the presentation mode at that time set at that time is set. In the case of proceeding to step D422, since there is no reach variation and the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, the symbol type does not have to be particularly referred to in step D422.
The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (in this embodiment, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device), and naturally differs depending on the model. This effect mode (game mode) is related to the effect theme of the gaming machine, for example, military mode, decisive battle mode, and is corrected according to the special figure rotation state in the launch information control process (step D38). This is different from the production mode.

The first half notice allocation group address table is a table for selecting an address of the first half notice distribution group table, which will be described later, and the address data of the first half notice distribution group table is arranged in a matrix. In the first half notice allocation group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to the same MODE value (data specifying the first half variation pattern). When the variation pattern type is unreachable variation, each column of the first half notice allocation group address table has the same number of holds (the number of start winning memories in which the special display variation display game is not executed). Corresponding data is arranged. That is, in the first half notice allocation group address table in the case of the change without reach, the parameter for determining the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter for determining the column is the reserved number. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is other than the variation without reach, data corresponding to the same variation pattern type is arranged in each column of the first half notice allocation group address table. In other words, in the first half notice allocation group address table for cases other than reachless change, the parameter for determining the row is the MODE value, and the parameter for determining the column is the change pattern type.
Thus, in the case of this example, the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) change according to the number of holds only in the case of non-reach changes. become. For example, when the fluctuation is not reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases.

In step D423, based on the first half notice allocation group address table set in step D422, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the special figure type hold number is acquired.
Specifically, the address of the row corresponding to the MODE value (the value separated in step D171, and so on) is calculated as the row address of the set first half notice group address table. Next, the column address corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure type at that time is calculated as the column address of the set first-half notice allocation group address table. And based on these calculation results, the address of the first half notice distribution group table is acquired from the corresponding row and column position in the corresponding first half notice distribution group address table.

On the other hand, in step D424, the launch-related information (to be described later), model code, special figure type, symbol type, and the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the presentation mode at that time are set at that time. .
Next, in step D425, based on the first half notice allocation group address table set in step D424, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired.
Specifically, the address of the row corresponding to the MODE value is calculated as the row address of the set first-half notice allocation group address table. Next, the column address corresponding to the variation pattern type at that time (data determined in step D404, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated as the column address of the set first-half notice allocation group address table. And based on these calculation results, the address of the first half notice distribution group table is acquired from the corresponding row and column position in the corresponding first half notice distribution group address table.

When the process proceeds to step D426, a notice lottery process (lottery of notice effect by random number) is executed for the first half change using the first half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in the immediately preceding step D423 or D425. According to this notice lottery process, a distribution result is selected in advance for all the notice distribution types set in the first half notice distribution group table, and various pieces of information for designating the contents of the effect according to this distribution result are stored in advance. Each is stored in a predetermined storage area.
According to the processing up to step D426, the address of the first half notice allocation group table is selected, and the notice lottery process (first notice change lottery process of the first half variation) of step D426 is performed based on the selected first half notice distribution group table. Executed. Here, the first half notice allocation group table is a table in which the address of one notice distribution table and the address of the result area of one effect distribution result corresponding to the address are arranged in correspondence with the same row. It is. Depending on the variation pattern, there are a large number of different types of notice allocation (a lottery for determining the presence / absence and type of notice effect) performed for one variable display game. The number of lines also becomes enormous.

  Here, the firing-related information referred to in steps D422 and D424 includes at least the above-described firing state flag information (a firing flag indicating a touch state on the firing operation handle 11 or a firing stop indicating a touch-off state). Flag information), continuous touch state flag information (information saved in the process within the launch information control process in step D38), and ball rental amount information (information updated in step D363). Yes. The continuous touch state flag indicates whether or not the contact with the firing operation handle 11 is continuous for a continuous touch specified time (for example, 3 minutes) or longer (may be continuous including a non-contact state less than the unfired specified time). This flag indicates the player's game continuation state.

  Then, in steps D422 and D424, the first half notice allocation group address table to be selected is changed based on the firing related information including these pieces of information. As a result, the production changes according to the establishment of a predetermined production change condition (for example, the frequency of occurrence of a special notice production increases). For example, in the present embodiment, an effect changing condition is satisfied, including a condition (first condition) in which the player releases the hand (touch-off) from the firing operation handle 11 after the player has played a game for a predetermined time or longer (touched the firing operation handle 11). Then, the effect is changed, and the condition (second condition) that the amount of use of the ball rental exceeds the specified amount is included in the effect change condition. In addition, there is a condition (third condition) that there is only one special figure hold (special drawing start winning memory) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation that is about to start) to be changed. It may be included in this effect change condition. In the table selection in steps D422 and D424, the table to be selected changes depending on whether or not such a condition (for example, all of the second condition and the third condition in addition to the first condition) is satisfied. The content is changed. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the player can be eager to continue playing the game and the effect that the player can have a range of effects can be obtained without reducing the game efficiency. . That is, when a player who has played a game for a specified time or longer releases his handle from the handle, the effect is changed by the effect control device 300, and the change in reach caused by the game control device 100 is controlled by the effect change by the effect control device 300. Is not included, so the time efficiency does not decrease, and the player tries to continue the game by operating the handle again.

  It should be noted that the condition that the player releases the hand (touches off) from the firing operation handle 11 after a game (touches the firing operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more can be determined by the firing state flag and the continuous touch state flag. That is, when the firing state flag is a firing stop flag and the continuous touch state flag is a continuous touch condition establishment flag, the firing operation handle 11 is currently in a touch-off state where there is no contact with a player's finger or the like. Until a certain period of time (within a time shorter than the aforementioned unfired specified time), the firing operation handle 11 has been touched. Therefore, in steps D422 and D424, if the firing state flag is a firing stop flag and the continuous touch state flag is a continuous touch condition establishment flag, the first condition is satisfied, and the remaining second conditions and If the third condition is satisfied, the table is selected so that the contents of the effect change. The effect change condition may be an aspect in which success or failure is determined only by the first condition (an aspect in which there is no second condition or third condition), or an aspect in which success or failure is determined by the first condition and the second condition. Alternatively, the success or failure may be determined by the first condition and the third condition, or another condition may be added.

Next, after passing through step D426, steps D427 to D429 are executed.
Steps D427 to D429 are processes for drawing lottery of the second half change notice effect. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area in a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit This is a variation display in a state where the display is stopped and the variation display is performed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.
In step D427, the second-half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the launch-related information, model code, special figure type, symbol type, and presentation mode set at that time is set at that time, and the process proceeds to step D428. .
Here, the second half notice allocation group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table, and data of addresses in the second half notice distribution group table is arranged for each variation pattern type. That is, in the latter half notice allocation group address table, the data of each row of the table corresponds to each variation pattern type.

In step D428, the address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired. Specifically, the address of the latter half notice grouping table is acquired from the position of the row corresponding to the variation pattern type at that time in the latter half notice grouping address table set in the previous step D427.
Next, in step D429, a lottery for a notice appearing during the latter half of the change (during reach) is performed. That is, the notice lottery process (the lottery of the notice effect by random numbers) is executed for the latter half change using the latter half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in step D428.
According to this notice lottery process, a distribution result is selected in advance for all the notice distribution types set in the latter half notice distribution group table prepared in step D428, and the contents of the effect corresponding to this distribution result are selected. Various types of information to be designated are stored in advance in predetermined storage areas.

  According to the processing from step D427 to step D429, the address of the latter half notice allocation group table is selected, and the notice lottery process (the notice lottery of the latter half change) of step D429 is performed based on the selected latter half notice distribution group table. Process). Then, when selecting the second half notice allocation group address table in step D427, the above-mentioned launch related information is referred to in the same manner as in the case of the first half fluctuation, and the change in the production due to the establishment of the above-described production change condition is also related to the second half fluctuation. Realized.

Next, after passing through step D429, the process proceeds to step D431.
When the process proceeds to step D431, a basic BGM number (basic BGM song number) and a decoration number (a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp (LED)) corresponding to the effect mode are set, and then the process proceeds to step D432. Note that the BGM and decoration that are normally changed vary for each effect mode. In step D431, a default for each mode is set first. If it changes to a special BGM or decoration for a notice or the like, the scenario table is changed.

When the process proceeds to step D432, it is determined whether or not the first half variation type determined in the processing so far (particularly step D426) is a normal variation. If the variation is a normal variation, the process proceeds to step D433. The process proceeds to other processing steps (not shown) (variation processing when the first half variation type is not normal variation).
The first-half variation type is a variation notice type distributed on the production control device side in the same MODE (for example, the first half-second normal variation). In order to avoid complexity, here, only the state of the notice distribution when the first-half variation type is normal variation is described in the flowchart (FIG. 100). And the process of the various fluctuations (including pseudo-ream etc.) when the first-half fluctuation type is not a normal fluctuation is a step after the flow in which the determination result of step D432 is NO (omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 100). Although it is executed, after the processing after this flow is executed, the process proceeds to step D437.

When the process proceeds to step D433, it is determined whether or not the notice type (effect distribution result area data; notice data) determined in the processing so far (particularly steps D426 and D429, and so on) designates the reach start effect. If it is not the reach start effect, the process proceeds to the process when another notice effect is selected (not shown by the wavy line in FIG. 100) and then proceeds to step D437. If it is the reach start effect, the reach starts at step D434. After performing the effect setting process (described later), the process proceeds to step D437.
The reach start effect is a specific example of screen display, for example, an effect including a display as shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 (described later) (not only a display but also a sound output for the effect). May be included). This effect may be executed as a special notice effect (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate or a zero appearance rate in a normal state) performed when the above-described effect change condition is established, It may be an embodiment that is selected and executed independently.

When the process proceeds to step D437, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2. If special figure 2, the process proceeds to step D442 after executing steps D438 and D439. In the case), after executing steps D440 and D441, the process proceeds to step D442.
In step D438, special figure 2 reservation scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is set.
In step D439, the fourth symbol (special figure 2 fluctuation) scenario table information is set.
In step D440, special figure 1 hold scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is set.
In step D441, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fluctuation) scenario table information is set.
In these steps D438, D439 or D440, D441, scenario control data relating to an animation in which the hold (special drawing start memory) is reduced is set.

Next, when proceeding to step D442, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half variation pattern data) separated at step D171 commands normal variation. If normal variation is commanded, the procedure proceeds to step D443. If the command does not command normal variation, the process proceeds to another step omitted with a broken line in FIG.
Note that, after the flow in which the determination result of step D442 is NO (location not shown by the wavy line), the same processing as that of steps D443, D444, etc. is executed for the variable display effect when the MODE data is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

When the processing proceeds to step D443, the notice type (data of the result distribution result area; notice data) determined in the process so far designates SD1, which is one of the effects performed in the SD (super deformation) mode. If it is not SD1, the process proceeds to step D445. If it is SD1, the process returns after executing the SD1 variation setting process in step D444.
Note that the SD1 is output as an effect including not only the display as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) (described later) as a specific screen display example. May be included). This effect may be executed as a special notice effect (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate or a zero appearance rate in a normal state) performed when the above-described effect change condition is established, It may be an embodiment that is selected and executed independently.
When the process proceeds to step D445, it is determined whether the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D171 is a command for “displacement”. If “displacement”, the process returns to step D446 after executing the deviation setting process. If it is not “out of”, the process proceeds to another step omitted in the wavy line in FIG. The outlier setting process is a process including a scenario data setting process for performing the latter half variation effect of “out”. Note that although there are actually a plurality of types of “missing” rather than one (“missing normal-1”, “missing normal + 1”, etc.), detailed description thereof is omitted here.
In addition, after the flow in which the determination result in step D445 is NO (location not shown by the wavy line), steps D445 and D446 are performed for other reach effects in the case of normal fluctuation (including fluctuation display effects in the case of a big hit, for example). The same processing is executed, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and the process returns.

[Reach start effect setting process]
Next, the reach start effect setting process executed in step D434 of the change effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the process returns after step S451 to S459 are sequentially executed.
First, scenario layer number 1 is prepared in step D451, a scenario table (for example, shown in the upper part of FIG. 148) of the left symbol reach start effect is prepared in step D452, and scenario data setting processing is performed for the prepared scenario table in step D453. Execute, and then proceed to Step D454.
Next, scenario layer number 2 is prepared in step D454, a scenario table (for example, shown in the middle of FIG. 148) of the right symbol reach start effect is prepared in step D455, and scenario data setting processing is performed for the prepared scenario table in step D456. After that, the process proceeds to step D457.
Next, scenario layer number 4 is prepared in step D457, a scenario table (for example, the one shown in the lower part of FIG. 148) of the Toratarou reach start effect is prepared in step D458, and scenario data setting processing is performed for the prepared scenario table in step D459. And then return.

As described above, the scenario data setting process is to be executed in the scenario management storage areas (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is a process of setting scenario control data for performance.
In steps D451 to D459, scenario control data for executing a reach start effect is set.
Further, just because the “scenario table for the start of the tiger tale” is prepared and set in step D458, the character appearing in the start of the reach is not limited to the “tiger taro”. In the specification of the present application, the “scenario table for the start of tiger taro reach” is merely a name given to the scenario table for convenience of explanation.
In this example, the scenario layers with scenario layer numbers 1, 2, and 4 are used for reach start effects as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a scenario table for the start of Toraro Reach may be set in the scenario layer with the scenario layer number 5.

[SD1 fluctuation setting process]
Next, the SD1 variation setting process executed in step D444 of the variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, after the steps D461 to D477 are sequentially executed, the process returns.
In step D461, for example, a stop symbol setting process (details omitted) is executed in which the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol is set based on the symbol type saved in step D372 and stored in the stop symbol area.
The stop symbol area exists for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and is used in a symbol stop process described later. Further, the variation of SD1 in this embodiment may be a big hit, and in step D461, an outlier symbol or a big hit symbol is set based on the symbol type saved in step D372.

In step D462, the address (scenario table name) of the scenario table of SD1 corresponding to the ACT and the first half variation type is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage region of the RAM 311a (or RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 for temporarily storing the address of the symbol variation scenario table to be used. It is divided into areas for medium and medium symbols, and each symbol area is divided into 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half), and there are a total of 9 areas for storing the address of one scenario table. There are (= 3 × 3). On the other hand, the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 is a table for selecting a scenario table for symbol variation according to the command received from the game control device and the first half variation type (or further, the effect mode or the notice type) , Symbol variation list table) is registered for each command (each ACT data). In step D462, for example, first, the symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is selected, and then the setting pattern corresponding to the first variation type is selected from a plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table. The scenario table address of the selected setting pattern is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. In the above step D462, a combination of scenario tables for performing a fluctuating effect of SD1 in the SD mode is selected and saved. For example, a combination of at least 3rd (second half) is different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. ) Is selected and saved.
Here, the symbol variation list table includes, for each set pattern, each scenario table for the 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) symbols for the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. This is a table in which addresses are registered.

  In the present application, the period of the movement of the symbol within the first half variation time is “early” (1st), and the remaining period within the first half variation time is “first half” (2nd). Even if the same first half variation time, the movement of the symbol may be scrolled down as it is or hopped up once (a kind of notice), so that the movement does not go all the way "early + first half = first half fluctuation" It is the composition. The second half fluctuation time is “second half” (3rd). In addition, in this embodiment, the production contents are set for each period obtained by dividing the production at the time of special figure variation into a plurality of times in this way, and the whole production at the time of special figure fluctuation is combined as the production content of each period. It is a combination formula. This has the advantage that the total amount of data that must be stored in the nonvolatile memory for storing control data (PROM 321 in this example) is reduced. That is, for example, if all tables are prepared for each production content that has a slightly different movement, the amount of data becomes enormous, but such a combination improves the problem.

In step D463, scenario layer number 0 is prepared.
In step D464, an address of the background scenario table for SD1 corresponding to the ACT or the like is prepared.
In step D465, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D463 and D464.
In step D466, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D467, the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early) area in the left symbol area) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D468, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D466 and D467.

In step D469, scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D470, the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early) area in the right symbol area) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D471, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D469 and D470.
In step D472, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In Step D473, the medium symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early) area in the medium symbol area described above) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area described above and prepared.
In step D474, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D472 and D473.

In step D475, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D476, an address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared.
In step D477, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D475 and D476.
According to the routine described above (SD1 variation setting process), the scenario layers (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, and 7) that require setting of scenario control data when performing SD1 variation effects are performed. As the scenario table, for example, combinations shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 described later (omitted from the scenario table for controlling the fourth symbol) are selected.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, details of the scenario setting process executed in step D28 in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D551 to D566 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D551, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared, and in the next step D552, scenario analysis processing (described later) is executed based on the preparation of step D551. . Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Similarly, in step D553, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D554.
In step D555, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D556.
In step D557, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D558.
In Step D559, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared, and scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D560 based on this preparation.
In step D561, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D562.
In step D563, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared, and scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D564 based on this preparation.
In Step D565, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared, and scenario analysis processing is executed in the next Step D566 based on this preparation.

  In this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and the scenario layer numbers are 0-7. Of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is basically for background, scenario layer 1 is for left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is middle symbol. Scenario layer 4 is for notice 1, scenario layer 5 is for notice 2, scenario layer 6 is for holding, and scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

  However, it is not restricted to this aspect. For example, although the present embodiment uses a flowchart with eight scenario layers, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the layers used for backgrounds and notices increase or decrease depending on the model specifications, and this embodiment is described as limited to a few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the above embodiment, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for left symbol, scenario layer 3 is for right symbol, scenario layer 4 is for middle symbol Yes, the scenario layer 5 may be reserved, the scenario layer 6 may be for other notices, and the scenario layer 7 may be for the fourth symbol.

As described above, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer, and when there is something to be controlled, the corresponding scenario management area X (where X = 0 to 7). When the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D283 and D287 described above). . For example, since no hold display is performed in a movie waiting for a customer, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (address area of scenario management area 6).
Also, the allocation of the control target of the scenario layer is basically basic. For example, as shown in FIG. 136, the design (decoration special figure) may be controlled by the scenario layer 0 for background.

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis process executed in step D552 and the like in the scenario setting process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D571, the value of brk (data used for repetition of processing to be described later) is set to 0, and then in step D572, the address area of the prepared scenario management area X is set. After the set data (scenario management area X address data or NULL) is loaded, the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the “address area of the prepared scenario management area X” means, for example, when this routine is executed in the above-described step D552, the address area (scenario) prepared in the immediately preceding step D551. If this routine is executed in step D554 described above, this is the address area prepared in step D553 immediately before (address area of scenario management area 1), etc. The case is prepared in the previous step as well.

When the process proceeds to step D573, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded at step D572 is NULL. If NULL, control returns because control is not necessary. If not, the process proceeds to step D574.
Proceeding to step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded at step D572 is read, and it is determined whether the value of this scenario timer is less than 0. If it is greater than or equal to 0, step D575 is executed and the routine proceeds to step D576. The value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in the above-described step D284 every time scenario control data is set. However, since 0 is the lower limit, it is determined as abnormal when it is less than 0. In step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, an update is performed to decrease the value of the scenario timer by 1.
When it proceeds to step D576, it is determined whether or not the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the time is not yet up, so the process returns. If it is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D577.

  According to these steps D574 to D576, wait timer management is performed. That is, only the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table at the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (it does not proceed to the next line of the scenario table but waits there, and continues to produce at that time). . For example, in the 20th line (// 19) in FIG. 136, the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (300). Therefore, the time corresponding to 300 frames remains in this line, and after the time has elapsed, the next time is reached. This operation corresponds to “an operation that delays the progress of control of the scenario table”. In the scenario table, between a line in which a code (a constant wait code or the like (including a PB wait code) is included) between a wait time value and a wait time value is set, and a line in which a constant wait code or the like is set next. All the opcodes in the line () are executed at the same time. When the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less as a result of the update in step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed out, so that the control process for the target scenario table proceeds to proceed through step D576 to step D577. It becomes the composition which advances to. However, the target scenario table control process (step D584 and subsequent steps) is executed after the timer management process for the PB valid time described later.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572) is read to determine whether the value of this PB timer is greater than zero. If it is greater than 0, the time is not up, so the process proceeds to step D578, and if it is 0 or less, the time is up, so the process proceeds to step D583.
In step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set, the process proceeds to step D579. If the PB operation flag is not set, the target PB timer is determined in step D582. After the update for reducing the value of 1 by 1, the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when a pressing operation of PB (push button 9) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 in the main process described above.

Proceeding to step D579, the value at this point of the target PB timer (that is, the remaining time of the PB valid time when PB is pressed) is stored as the PB effect addition time, and then at step D580, the target PB timer is stored. The timer value is set to 0, and in step D581, a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set is set). In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB was pressed, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB is operated. A PB detection flag indicating that this has been done is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
In step D583, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the PB operation is not detected and the time is not up, so the process returns. Since the PB operation is performed or the time is up, the process proceeds to step D584.

According to steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when a PB timer value larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572), this PB timer value is handled. The operation of delaying the control of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) for the PB valid time is realized for the time to be set. Here, “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table and providing the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer is 0 (that is, the PB timer is timed up) or the PB is pressed. Until it is done, it means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table, continuing to produce at that time). For example, in the 28th line (// 27) in FIG. 136, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (30), the line remains in this line for a time corresponding to 30 frames. Although the operation proceeds to the 29th line, the operation according to the 28th line is the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, in the next 29th line (// 28), since the PB waiting code is set and the valid time value is (2970), this valid time value (2970) is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB press operation, the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames remains in this line, and if there is a PB press operation within this effective time, the process immediately proceeds to the next line. In this way, the PB timer is set. The operation of waiting for the pressing operation of the PB for the effective time (PB effective time) is equivalent to the “operation for providing the PB effective time by delaying the control of the scenario table”. Then, without the PB operation, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by updating the step D582 and the PB timer expires or the PB valid time until the PB timer expires is set. If PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581, and in this case, the determination result in step D583 is NO (the PB timer is 0), and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, if the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, and further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control proceeds immediately (this In this case, the PB valid time is 0 (none). Since the PB valid time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and no PB valid time is provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, control processing for the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
When the processing proceeds to step D584, the processing from step D584 to step D623 at the loop end is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, in step D623, which is the rear loop end, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D584, first, steps D585 to D588 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D589.
In Step D585, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area. For example, in the case of scenario layer number 0 in the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is loaded in this step D585.
In step D586, the operation code of a specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired. As described above, the scenario table is one in which the operation code and operand data (scenario data) are set in each line, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, for example. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the “motion continuation code” that is the data of the opcode in the first line of the top scenario layer 0 Is acquired in step D586. In the case of FIG. 136, for example, if the designated line is the first line, the “motion 1 deletion code” (specific data, for example, “51h”), which is the operation code data of the first line, is obtained in step D586. To be acquired. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 136, for example, if the designated line is the 16th line, “motion 10 registration code” (specific data, for example, “4Ah”), which is the operation code data of the 16th line, is acquired in step D586. Is done.

In step D587, the opcode obtained in the immediately preceding step D586 is prepared by separating it into upper bits and lower bits. For example, when the opcode data is “51h” described above, the upper bit “5” and the lower bit “1” are separately prepared. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among “51h” which is the “motion 1 deletion code”, the upper bit “5” means the motion deletion, and the lower bit “1” is the target (in this case, the motion deletion target) motion. This means that the layer is motion 1.
In step D588, an operand of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table designated by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired and prepared. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated row is the first row, “motion index No.” that is the operand data of the first row of the topmost scenario layer 0 .. (51) ”is acquired and prepared in step D588. In the case of FIG. 136, if the designated line is the 16th line (the operation code is “motion 10 registration code”), “motion index No. (−1)” that is the operand data of this 16th line is entered in step D588. Get and prepare.

When the process proceeds to step D589, the prepared opcode high-order data (data prepared by separating in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data (motion registration code) for instructing motion registration, motion registration processing ( After executing (to be described later), the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for commanding motion registration, the process proceeds to step D590.
When the process proceeds to step D590, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data (motion deletion code) for instructing the motion deletion, a motion deletion process (described later) is executed in step D602, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D591.

In step D591, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is data (motion continuation code) for instructing motion continuation, motion continuation processing (described later) is executed in step D603, and then processing proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D592.
In step D592, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data for instructing a constant wait (constant wait code), constant weight processing (described later) is executed in step D604, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D593.

In step D593, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data for instructing a variable weight (variable weight code), variable weight processing (described later) is executed in step D605, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D594.
When the process proceeds to step D594, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the PB wait (PB wait code), the PB wait process (described later) is executed in step D606, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D595.

In step D595, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB determination branch code) for instructing the PB determination branch, PB determination branch processing (described later) is executed in step D607, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for instructing the PB determination branch, the process proceeds to step D596.
When the process proceeds to Step D596, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data for stopping the symbol (stop symbol set code), the symbol stop process is executed at Step D608 and then the procedure proceeds to Step D621 to command the symbol stop. If it is not data, the process proceeds to step D597.

When the process proceeds to step D597, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (design reverse calculation replacement code) for instructing symbol reverse calculation replacement, after performing symbol reverse calculation replacement processing (described later) in step D609, step D597 is performed. The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not the data for instructing the symbol reverse calculation replacement, the process proceeds to Step D598.
In step D598, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (fluctuation scenario switching code) for instructing the switching of the fluctuation scenario, the fluctuation scenario switching process is executed in step D610 and then the flow advances to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D599.

When the process proceeds to step D599, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data for commanding repetition (repetition code), the process proceeds to step D621 after iterative processing is executed at step D611. Proceed to step D600.
When the process proceeds to step D600, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the end (end code), the end process is executed in step D612. Proceed to other steps not shown. In addition, other steps (not shown) (steps indicated by wavy lines in FIG. 105) determine the contents of the prepared opcode upper data as in the above-described steps D589 to D612, and the determination result is other A process corresponding to the case of the type of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step D621. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), the process returns. It has become.

Next, when proceeding to step D621, the data set at this time is read into the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, and it is determined whether this data is NULL. Is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step D623. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
Then, when proceeding to step D623, as described above, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the processing is repeated from the next step D585, and the value of brk is not 0. In this case, this routine is terminated and the process returns.

For this reason, in one of the processes in steps D601 to D612, the value of brk is set to a non-zero value, or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps D584 and D623 as loop ends is completed and the process returns. Until the loop process is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address for designating the scenario table and its row) is appropriately changed, and the loop process is repeated until a series of steps are repeated. The production control is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

Here, the motion index will be described.
The motion index specifies a motion control table (motion table), and for example, “motion index No. (51)” that is operand data in the first row of the scenario table of the uppermost scenario layer 0 in FIG. , The motion index data is “51”. For example, the motion index data specifies a specific row of a motion list table as shown in FIG. 135, thereby specifying a motion control table (motion table).

FIG. 135 shows an example of the motion list table stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device. The motion list table is a data table of a motion table in which data relating to a large number of motion tables is arranged in each row (each record). The data in each row of this motion list table table is data related to one motion table. Each row of the motion list table includes the number of frames, the number of motion commands, the name of the motion table, the number of behaviors, and the behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
The number of frames (display frame number) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) are defined in the motion table.
・ The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
-The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table in which the behavior (processing address) at the time of the motion control is defined.
If the number of behaviors is 0, the behavior table is naturally unnecessary.

Here, the behavior is a function for setting the operation of the object (display element). In this example, basic image data (character data) defined mainly on the motion table is used to change according to the situation.
Also, on the right side of the motion list table in FIG. 135, the display content corresponding to the value of the motion index is shown. For example, the value of the motion index for specifying the motion control table for the fourth symbol (figure 2 variation) is 62. In addition, the value of the motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (figure 1 variation) is 61.

[Motion registration process]
Next, details of the motion registration process executed in step D601 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D631 and D632 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D633.
In step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table). This is an update process for advancing the designated line when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time to the next line, and the designated line of the target scenario table is changed to the next line by performing this update process. The above loop processing (steps D584 to D623) is repeated.

  In step D632, the address of the motion management area is prepared from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the opcode separated in step D587. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is configured to have storage areas for motion management called “motion management area address area” and “motion management area”. Of these, the motion management area is the number of objects (maximum number) of objects that are subject to display control (not necessarily displayed on the screen) (for example, in the case of the left symbol, the next symbol, the current symbol, the previous symbol) 3), an area for displaying the number of frames, an area for storing the frame number indicating the number of frames processed (frame number area), and the number of rows in the motion table. An area for storing the command position indicating (command position area), and an area for storing the address data (corresponding to the motion index) indicating which table to use among a plurality of motion list tables (motion list) Table area) and display information areas corresponding to the number of displays.

Also, there are motion management areas with the same structure corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, there are motions 0 to 13), and there are 14 motion layers in this example. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Furthermore, corresponding to this motion management area, there are 14 address areas in the motion management area in this example (motion 0 address to motion 13 address). Here, since the address area of the motion management area is an area for storing the address of the motion management area, it is provided for each motion management area (that is, for each motion layer), and there are 14 in this example.
In step D632, in order to identify one of the plurality of motion management areas as described above, a motion management area corresponding to the motion layer number specified by the data of the lower bits of the operation code (hereinafter, corresponding motion management area) is specified. Read out from the address area of the corresponding motion management area and prepare. In the present application, the motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) is simply expressed as a motion number or used as a motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). There is a case.

  There are as many display information areas as the number of displays (number of objects) in the motion management area, and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of the display upper left point, and an upper left display point. Y coordinate, X coordinate of upper right display point, Y coordinate of upper right display point, X coordinate of lower left display point, Y coordinate of lower left display point, image index, background color, foreground color, IPicture (I picture) only movie It includes an area for storing time frame count and behavior index data.

  Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image (movie) and information indicating the type of movie (I picture or not)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing such as imparting transparency) to be added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (for example, transparency in the case of providing transparency). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point 3 There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or a movie. The frame count at the time of a moving picture of only IPicture is data indicating what frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). Note that the behavior (design replacement) is to replace only the character (still image or moving image) at the same size and the same display position, and is different from the cut-in character replacement to replace the character or the like appearing in the effect display. In the cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of the character can be changed by the replacement. Note that the cut-in character replacement process is performed, for example, in a subroutine (notification effect setting process 1) that is called and executed in the above-described variation effect setting process. .

Next, in step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to step D635. If not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 (described later) is performed in step D634. Is executed, the process proceeds to step D635.
In step D635, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code separated in step D587 is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D636.
In step D636, the head address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code, and the process proceeds to step D637.

  In these steps D632 to D636, anyway, finally, in step D636, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 is set as the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data at an address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, the motion data initialization process 1 (for setting the opening of the development area used for moving picture development, etc.) This will be executed in step D634.

Next, when proceeding to Step D637, it is determined whether the operand data prepared in Step D588 is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, Steps D638 to D640 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. If it is less than 0 (ie, a negative value). For example, steps D641 to D643 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.
In step D638, the operand data (the operand data prepared in step D588, and so on) is prepared as a motion index.
In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set in an area for storing the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower operation code (hereinafter referred to as the in-use motion index area). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing data of a motion index (in-use motion index) that designates a row to be controlled in the motion list table for each motion number, and is provided for each motion number. Yes. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, stored) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bit of the opcode separated in step D587.
In step D640, motion data initialization processing 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

On the other hand, in step D641, the motion index data corresponding to the lower part of the opcode is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared. The motion index area includes, for example, a storage area (SU1 cut-in area, SU2 cut-in area, SU3 cut-in area) in which motion index data is saved in the above-described notice effect setting process 1 (not shown). . In this step D641, the motion index specified by the lower bit of the opcode separated in step D587 and the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not the probability change is in progress) out of the plurality of motion index areas in the RAM. Prepare motion index data from the area.
Next, in step D642, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower part of the operation code.
In step D643, motion data initialization processing 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

  Among the steps D637 to D643 described above, the determination result of step D637 is YES (operand is 0 or more), the route for executing steps D638 to D640, and the determination result of step D637 is NO (operand is less than 0). Thus, the route for executing steps D6412 to D643 is different as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the motion index value (fixed value) set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in the RAM. This is a route that uses the value of the motion index (not a fixed value) for control. If you want to change the motion index to be used depending on the state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in probability change), a negative value (for example, “−1”) is set as the operand value, and the latter route is executed. It becomes the composition which is done.

[Motion data initialization process 1]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 1 executed in step D634 (or step D674 described later) in the motion registration process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and frame numbers stored in the motion management area.
When this routine is started, first, step D651 to step D655 are repeatedly executed until the variable i is incremented from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until the final value (the final value = the number of displays−1) is reached, and then the process proceeds to step D656. move on. That is, in step D651, immediately after the routine starts, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, when returning to step D651, the value of variable i is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D652. The closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as the target motion management area) corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587. . That is, in this routine, the loop processing of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for the number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step D656.

In step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set, and then the process proceeds to step D653. In this step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the display information areas corresponding to the display number in the target motion management area is set.
In step D653, the display type data in the display information area to which the address is set in the previous step D652 is read, and it is determined whether or not the display type is a moving image. If the display type is a moving image, the decompression area (the area used for decompressing the compressed video data) is set to release in step D654, and then the process proceeds to step D655. Do not proceed to step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656.

  Next, when proceeding to step D656, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed at steps D656 to D658, and then the process returns. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D656, the frame number is set to -1 in step D657, and the command position is set to 0 in step D658.

[Motion data initialization process 2]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 2 executed in steps D640 and D643 (or step D689 described later) in the motion registration process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps D661 to D663, processing for initializing parameters of the target motion management area is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D661, the frame number is set to -1 in step D662, and the command position is set to 0 in step D663.
In step D664, the motion list table area in the target motion management area specifies the address (motion list table and its row) corresponding to the in-use motion index (for example, the data set in step D639 or D642). Address), and then return.

[Motion deletion processing]
Next, details of the motion deletion process executed in step D602 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D671 and D672 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D673.
In step D671, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address for specifying the next row of the table).
In step D672, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D673.

Next, when proceeding to Step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded at Step D672 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to Step D675. Later, the process proceeds to Step D675.
In step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process advances to step D676.
In step D676, the in-use motion index data corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, and so on) is cleared, and then the process returns.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is finished, and thereby the motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area and data in the motion index area in use) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, details of the motion continuation process executed in step D603 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D681 and D682 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D683.
In step D681, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table).
In step D682, the data of the motion index in use corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code is loaded.

Proceeding to step D683, it is determined whether the data of the in-use motion index loaded at step D682 matches the operand acquired at step D588. If the operands match, the process returns. If not, the processes after step D684 are executed. To do. Here, it is determined whether the currently controlled motion is the same as the motion specified in the scenario table, and if it is the same, the currently controlled motion should be continued as it is, so the process returns without any processing, If they are not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed to perform new motion registration.
In step D684 and subsequent steps, processing similar to the motion registration processing (route using the scenario table value) described above is performed.
That is, in step D684, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D685.

Next, in step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to step D687. If not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D686. Later, the process proceeds to step D687.
In step D687, the head address of the target motion management area is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D688.
In step D688, the head address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D689.
In step D689, the motion data initialization process (the above-described motion data initialization process 2) is executed.
In step D690, the operand data is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower bit of the opcode, and then the process returns.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently controlled, the process is continued as it is, and if it is different, a new registration process is executed. As a result, for example, if the background during normal fluctuation does not change due to reach or the like, the movie continues over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Constant wait processing]
Next, details of the constant weight process executed in step D604 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D691, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
In step D692, the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D693, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.
According to this routine, a time value or the like for waiting for a specified fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 20th line (// 19) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136, this routine is executed because the operation code is a constant wait code, and the operand wait time is (300). 300 (10 seconds = 300 × 1/30) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above is completed.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, details of the variable weight process executed in step D605 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D695, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time (the value set in step D579) to the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D697, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

  In this routine, a time value or the like for waiting for a variable time when the effect time changes due to the player's button operation (PB operation) is set. As a result, the effect that is performed thereafter becomes longer as the button is pressed sooner after the button instruction is received, and an operation is performed in which the effect is performed only for a short time when pressed with the effective time. For example, in the case of the eleventh line (// 10) in the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, this routine is executed because the opcode is a variable wait code, and the effective time value of the operand is (55). In D696, the 55 + PB effect addition time is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes larger as the player performs the PB operation sooner after the effect for prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see step D579). For this reason, the earlier the player performs the PB operation, the longer the effect to be performed thereafter.

[PB waiting process]
Next, details of the PB waiting process executed in step D606 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D701, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
In step D702, the operand data is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D703, the PB detection flag area flag in the target scenario management area is cleared.
Next, in step D704, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

  In this routine, the setting for starting the push button effect is performed. For example, in the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, the motion deletion process of motion 9 is first executed in the first line (// 0), and then the motion registration process of motion 8 (see FIG. 14) in the second line (// 1). After the push button ON / OFF effect motion table “MDat0070” shown in 135 is set, the operation code of the next third line (// 2) is the PB wait code. Therefore, since this routine is executed and the effective time value of the operand is (90), 90 is set as the timer area value in the above step D702, and the push button effect of 3 seconds (= 90 × 1/30) is started. Is done. In step D703, in order to start the push button effect, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) is operated is initially set to OFF (the flag is not set).

[PB decision branch processing]
Next, details of the PB determination branch process executed in step D607 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described below with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D711 whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set). In step D713, if not set (if the PB detection flag is OFF), the process advances to step D712.
In step D712, the same update process as in step D631 is executed, and the process returns.
When the process proceeds to Step D713, the same update process as in Step D631 is executed, and the process proceeds to Step D714.
When the process proceeds to step D714, it is determined whether or not the address update process of step D713 has been completed for the operand data prepared in step D588, and if completed, the process returns. repeat.

  This routine is executed when the PB timer that counts the valid time without pushing the push button in the above-described push button effect has expired or when the timer is forced to zero because the PB is pushed within the valid time. Process. If the time is up without pressing PB, the process proceeds to step D712 through step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table advances by one line and returns. If PB is pressed within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 via step D711, and the specified line of the scenario table jumps by the amount specified by the operand.

  For example, in the case of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, when the control up to the third line is completed as described above, this routine is executed because the operation code of the next fourth line (// 3) is the PB determination branch code. Since the operand table skip count is (3), if PB is pushed within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result in step D714 is NO until step D713 is executed three times. As a result, in the scenario table, the next designated line jumps to the seventh line (// 6). Then, when jumping to the seventh line, an effect after the seventh line (in the case of the upper side in FIG. 142, an effect in which a warrior character appears on the display screen as a motion 8 and outputs speech sound) is started. On the other hand, even when this routine is executed as described above, if PB is not pushed within the valid time, the process returns only after step D712 is executed once (this routine ends). The designated line on the upper side is the next 5th line (// 4), the motion deletion process of motion 8 is executed by this 5th line, and then the end process described later is executed by the 6th line, and the push described above The button production simply ends (no warrior character appears).

[Design stop processing]
Next, details of the symbol stop process executed in step D608 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D721, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed, and then the flow proceeds to step D722.
When the process proceeds to step D722, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the left symbol. If it is the left symbol, the process returns after executing step D727, and if not, the process proceeds to step D723. In step D727, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (left).
When the process proceeds to step D723, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates the right symbol. If it is the right symbol, the process returns after executing step D728, and if not, the process proceeds to step D724. In step D728, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (right).

When the process proceeds to step D724, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates a middle symbol. If it is a middle symbol, the process proceeds to step D729a after executing step D729, and otherwise proceeds to step D725. In step D729, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (medium) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (medium).
When the process proceeds to step D729a, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed. If it is being executed, the process proceeds to step D729b, and if it is not being executed, the process is returned. Whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed is determined by determining that the pre-reading effect is being executed if the pre-reading effect executing flag is set.
Proceeding to step D729b, it is determined whether the number of pre-reading effects is zero. If it is zero, the pre-reading effect is completed, so the process returns after clearing the pre-reading effect execution flag in step D729c. Return without executing D729c.

The number of pre-read effects is the number of pre-read executions. In the case of performing a pre-read effect (pre-reading notice) in the pre-read lottery process (not shown), which is a subroutine executed in the pre-reading variation command process in step D186 described above. And is updated by -1 at the time of the start of the special figure change in step D407 described above.
The pre-reading effect execution flag is a flag that is set when a pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice) is performed in the pre-reading lottery process (not shown). In the case of this example, the fluctuation of the special figure stops in the order of left → right → middle. (Steps D729a to D729c described above) are included. In other words, in the state where the pre-reading effect execution flag is set, when the pre-reading effect number is zero, the pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared at the timing when the middle symbol stops. If the stop order of the special figure variation is different, similarly, the process of clearing at the timing when the symbol to be stopped last stops may be performed.
Further, although omitted, processing such as checking whether the time is short or the number of times of change with high probability is also in the same location on the flowchart (location executed when the determination result in Step D724 is YES).

  Proceeding to step D725, it is determined whether the low-order bit data of the opcode designates Fig. 1 Fig. 4 design (4 Fig. 1 of Fig. 1). Return to step D726 if it is not the 4th symbol in FIG. In step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol).

Proceeding to step D726, it is determined whether the low-order bit data of the operation code designates special figure 2 4th figure (4th figure of special figure 2), and if it is special figure 2 4th design, step D731 is executed. After execution, the process returns. If not, the process returns. In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 2 4 symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 2 4 symbol).
This routine is a process for stopping the variable display of a symbol such as a decorative special figure. Steps D727, D728, D729, D730, and D731 are processes for setting the stop symbol. For example, if the sixth line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is a designated line, the operation code is a stop symbol set code (left symbol), so this routine is executed and the determination result in the above step D722 becomes YES. Step D727 is executed to set the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special figure.

[Design reverse calculation process]
Next, details of the symbol reverse calculation replacement process executed in step D609 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D741, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D742, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode specifies the left symbol. If it is the left symbol, the process proceeds to step D745 after executing steps D743 and D744, and if not, the process proceeds to step D748. move on.
In step D743, a remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D744, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D743) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (a negative value). Return to step D747 after executing step D747 without executing step D746.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D747, the value of the symbol number (set in step D744, and if negative, the value adjusted in step D746) is set as the current symbol (left).

Next, when proceeding to step D748, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the right symbol. If it is the right symbol, the process proceeds to step D751 after executing steps D749 and D750. Proceed to D754.
In step D749, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D750, the result obtained by subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D749) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when proceeding to Step D751, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set at Step D750 is less than 0. After executing step D753 without executing, the process returns.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D753, the value of the symbol number (set in step D750 and adjusted in step D752 if negative) is set as the current symbol (right).

Next, when proceeding to step D754, it is determined whether or not the lower bit data of the opcode designates a middle symbol. If it is a middle symbol, the process proceeds to step D757 after executing steps D755 and D756. To do.
In step D755, a remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D756, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D755) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (medium) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when proceeding to Step D757, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set at Step D756 is less than 0. Return to step D759 after executing step D759.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D759, the value of the symbol number (set in step D756 or corrected in step D758 if negative) is set as the current symbol (medium).

The symbol reverse calculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing the symbol with a symbol several symbols before the scheduled stop (the symbol that is the previous symbol by the number of symbol feeds) such as the moment of slowdown after the end of high-speed fluctuation.
For example, when the third line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated line, the opcode is the left symbol reverse calculation replacement code, so this routine is executed and the determination result in Step D742 is YES, Steps D743 to D747 are executed to set the current symbol (left). In this case, the operand is data meaning the number of symbols to be sent, and in the third line of the MS_LZ100, the operand is the number of frames to be sent (2). Therefore, in step D743, the remainder of the division of 2 ÷ 9 is 2 Is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in step D744 using the value of the frame difference. For example, if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (= 7-2) is set as the symbol number. If the symbol number set in step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a rounded value (for example, if -1, 8 = -1 + 9). After that, in step D747, the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left).

  The above operation is the same for the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Further, “9” in step D743 and the like represents the number of symbols in each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may have a different value for each reel.

[Change scenario switching process]
Next, details of the change scenario switching process executed in step D610 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D761, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (command to switch the left symbol variation display to 2nd (first half)), and the left symbol scenario. If it is 2nd, it returns after executing step D762 thru | or 765 sequentially, and when it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd, it will progress to step D767.
In step D762, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol.

In Step D763, the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in step D462 above, there are various symbol variation scenario tables (for 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) scenario tables, In this step D763, 2nd (first half) scenario table addresses are prepared for the left symbol.
In step D764, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D762 and D763.
In step D765, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, the address area of the scenario management area prepared in step D553 etc.), and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (instructing switching of the right symbol variation display to 2nd). If it is the right symbol scenario 2nd, steps D768 to 771 is executed in order, and then the process returns. If it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to Step D772.
In step D768, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right symbol.

In step D769, the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (for the right symbol and the 2nd scenario table) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D770, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D768 and D769.
In Step D771, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when proceeding to step D772, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (instructing switching of the middle symbol variation display to 2nd). If it is the middle symbol scenario 2nd, steps D773 to After executing 776 sequentially, the process returns, and if it is not the middle symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D777.
In step D773, scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D774, the address of the medium symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for 2nd for the medium symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D775, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D773 and D774.
In Step D776, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when proceeding to step D777, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (command to switch the left symbol variation display to 3rd (second half)), and if it is the left symbol scenario 3rd. After executing Steps D778 to 781 in sequence, the process returns. If not the left symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to Step D782.
In step D778, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol.

In step D779, the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (the scenario symbol for 3rd (second half) for the left symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D780, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779.
In step D781, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D782, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (instructing switching of the right symbol variation display to 3rd). If it is the right symbol scenario 3rd, steps D783 to After executing 786 sequentially, the process returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D787.
In step D783, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is a right symbol.

In step D784, the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (for the right symbol and the 3rd scenario table) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D785, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D783 and D784.
In step D786, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when proceeding to step D787, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 3rd (instructing switching of the middle symbol variation display to 3rd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 3rd, steps D788 to After the 791 is executed in sequence, the process returns, and when it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd, the process returns.
In step D788, scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D789, the address of the middle symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for medium symbols for 3rd) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D790, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789.
In step D791, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the change scenario switching process described above, the scenario change in the above-described symbol change section, that is, the scenario change from 1st (early) to 2nd (first half) or 2nd (first half) to 3rd (second half). Is done. That is, the variation display effect of the decoration special drawing is divided into three sections, usually “early, first half, second half”, and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this routine. For example, if the 9th line (// 8) of the last line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated line, the operation code is the variable scenario switching code, and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd. Is executed, the determination result in step D761 is YES, and steps D762 to D765 are executed. A new scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol (for example, MS_LZ300 shown in FIG. 137) is the target of control. It is set as a scenario table, and settings for executing this scenario table are made.
Depending on the type of variation, the time values for the breaks of “early, first half, second half” are different. There are also fluctuations without 3rd (second half) (such as fluctuations without reach).

[Repetition processing]
Next, details of the iterative process executed in step D611 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D795, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (address specifying the previous line of the scenario table).
Next, in step D796, it is determined whether or not the table address has been returned to the previous record by the number of operands acquired in step D588. If the operand is returned, the process returns, and the operand is not returned. In step D795, the process is repeated.

  The repetitive processing described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, if the 52nd line (// 51) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is a designated line, this routine is executed because the opcode is a repeat code and the operand is the return number (22). When step D795 is executed 22 times, the determination result in step D796 is YES, and this routine is terminated. As a result, the designated line of the scenario table is the 30th line before the 22th line (// 29). Return to. The 30th line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is a line that starts a movie of a customer waiting demonstration effect (the operation code is a motion 0 registration code and the operand is a motion index No. (13)). Following the movie, it has a table structure in which a symbol display for a demonstration of waiting for a customer is performed. For this reason, after that, the movie display and the symbol display as a customer waiting demonstration effect are repeated, and data for one loop (data from the 30th line to the last line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136) is prepared. It will be over.

〔End processing〕
Next, details of the termination process executed in step D612 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, in step D798, NULL is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the target scenario management area is not set, and the scenario ends.
For example, when the 15th line (// 14) of the last line of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142 is a designated line, the operation code is an end code, so this routine is executed, and the target scenario management area in step D798 above The address area is set to NULL, and the scenario ends. As described above, this routine is executed when a series of scenarios are all completed.

[Motion control processing]
Next, details of the motion control process executed in step D30 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the loop processing of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the loop processing end condition (control for all motion management areas 0 to 13). Returns when the process ends. That is, at the start of this routine, first, in step D801, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0), the process proceeds to step D802, and the processes after step D802 are executed. The management area number is incremented by 1 (that is, X = X + 1). In step D818, it is determined whether the end condition (X = 14) is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the process returns. If not, step D801 is determined. The process returns to step D802 and proceeds to step D802.

Hereinafter, Step D802 and the subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, any one of 0 to 13 in this example).
In step D802, the initialization flag used in this routine is cleared. In the next step D803, the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X, and then the process proceeds to step D804.
In step D804, it is determined whether or not the data at the address loaded in step D803 is NULL. If not, the process proceeds to step D805.

In step D805, based on the address loaded in step D803, data in the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, data for designating the motion list table to be controlled this time and data for specifying the row) is loaded and prepared. Proceed to step D806.
In step D806, data of the number of display frames in a row of the motion list table (hereinafter referred to as a designated row) designated by the data loaded in step D805 is read, and the number of display frames (the number of frames for executing a certain motion). If it is less than or equal to 0, the process proceeds to step D817, where it is abnormal. For example, if the first row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated row, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is “1”, so the determination result in step D806 is NO and step D807 is performed. Proceed to For example, if the fourth row in the list table is a designated row, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is “216”, so the determination result in step D806 is also NO and the process proceeds to step D807. As described above, since the period of time for each motion is different, the number of display frames corresponding to each motion table is defined, and the number of display frames should be defined for at least one frame. If the definition value on the motion list table for the number of frames is 0 or less, it is abnormal.

  In step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read to determine whether the value of the frame number is less than 0. If it is less than 0, a motion is newly registered (during motion registration). After executing step D808 (setting an initialization flag), the process proceeds to step D809. If it is not less than 0, the process proceeds to step D809 without executing step D808 because it is not during motion registration. Note that the frame number is set to “−1” in steps D657 and D662 in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, so if the motion is registered, the initialization flag is set in step D808. The This initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and determined in step D812 described later.

Proceeding to step D809, it is determined whether the frame number value in the motion management area X has reached the number of final frames (ie, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of display frames described above). If the number of frames is greater than or equal to the number of frames, Steps D810 and D811 are sequentially executed, and then Step D812 is performed.
In step D810, the above-described motion data initialization process 1 is executed, and in step D811, an initialization flag is set as in step D808.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) has reached the final frame number means that the control of the target motion table has been completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result in step D809 is YES (the frame number has reached the final frame number), the motion data initialization process 1 and the initialization flag are set in the same way as in the motion registration, and the same The motion table is executed again from the beginning.

When proceeding to step D812, it is determined whether the initialization flag is set. If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if it has been cleared), the process proceeds to step D816 after executing step D819.
In steps D813, D814, and D815, the frame number, display number, and command position values in the motion management area X are set to 0, respectively.
In step D819, an update is performed to increase the value of the frame number in the motion management area X by one. The process proceeds to step D819 because the initialization flag is not set (that is, when the target motion table is being executed), so that the frame numbers need to be sequentially increased.

  Note that the value of the display number set to 0 in step D814 (a value indicating the number of objects under control) is added or deleted during the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). Updated (+1 or -1). In addition, the value of the command position set to 0 in step D815 (a value indicating the number of lines in the motion table) is also updated during a motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D880 described later). A command position value of 0 indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. Further, the value of the display number is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (such as symbols and warning characters) that are actually displayed on the screen at the same time.

Next, when the process proceeds to Step D816, a motion command execution process (described later) for executing control of the target motion table is executed, and the process proceeds to Step D817.
In step D817, the address of the motion management area address area itself is updated. That is, an update for increasing the value of the motion management area number X by 1 is executed. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched to the next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (motion layer is motion 1) is the control target before execution of step D817, the motion management area 2 (motion layer is motion 2) becomes the control target after execution. .
Then, if step D817 is executed, the process proceeds to step D818. If the above-described end condition (in this example, the number X = 14) is satisfied, the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D801. The process is repeated from step D802.

[Motion command execution processing]
Next, details of the motion command execution process executed in step D816 in the above-described motion control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D821, from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area), the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as motion list table) (ie, the motion list table) The motion list table to be controlled this time and data for designating the row) are loaded, and the process proceeds to Step D822.

  In step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). If the number of motion commands is greater than or equal to the number of motion commands, all commands (all rows in the target motion table) have been executed, and the process returns. The process proceeds to step D823 to execute the next motion table for the next frame. For example, if the fourth line in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated line, the number of motion commands is “1830”, and therefore the value of the command position in the motion management area X is “1830” in step D822. If it is not less than “1830”, the process proceeds to step D823. The value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658, D663, etc. in the above-described motion data initialization processes 1 and 2, and each row (command) of the motion table is described in step D845 described later. Each time is executed, +1 is updated. Therefore, if this value is equal to or greater than “1830”, all rows of the target motion table have been executed, and the process returns.

Proceeding to step D823, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D821), Proceed to step D824. For example, if the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated row, the motion table name is “Mdat003”, and therefore this “Mdat003” is acquired as the motion table address (from the ROM (PROM 321)). Take out). The motion list table area of the RAM (RAM 311a) stores the address (points to the address of the table in the ROM) of the leftmost column (the position of the number of frames) of the motion list table. In step D821, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. In step D823, the value of “motion table name (address)” indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM.
In this example, since the motion table address corresponds to the motion table name, if the motion table name is obtained, the motion table address is obtained.

  The motion table is a control table for executing each of the blocked display effects, as described above, but will be described in detail here. In the present application, an example of the motion table at the time of the push button notice is shown on the lower side of FIG. 142, and an example of the motion table at the start of the left symbol normal variation is shown in FIG. 138. Many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM 321 in this example). As shown in these drawings, in each row of the motion table, a command code is set at the head, and subsequently, a parameter corresponding to the command is set. However, there may be no parameters.

  For example, a command “additional 1 code” and a parameter “character No. (symbol“ 2 ”)” are set in the first line of FIG. 138, and a command “behavior code” is set in the second line. Parameters “object index (0)” and “behavior index (0)” are set, and the command “move 1 code”, “object index (0)”, and “X coordinate (0)” are set in the seventh line. ”,“ Y coordinate (−493) ”,“ image width data (296) ”, and“ image height data (490) ”are set, and only the command“ end code ”is displayed on the 10th line. Is set. Here, the object index is a number assigned to an object to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order of registration with an additional code. For example, the symbol “2” additionally registered in the first line in FIG. 138 becomes the object index (0), and the symbol “1” additionally registered in the third row becomes the object index (1). The additionally registered symbol “9” becomes the object index (2), and the value of the object index increases based on the number of characters (number of objects) to be displayed.

The smaller the value of the object index, the deeper the screen is displayed as the context of the display layer. That is, when the display positions overlap, an object having a large object index value is preferentially displayed on the screen.
Also, in the example of FIG. 138, three characters appear, but management is performed so that the total number of characters of all other categories (notices) used at the same time is 128. In other words, the VDP 312 in this example can display and control 128 characters simultaneously. Since characters can be arranged outside the screen, the number is not limited to 128 on the screen.
Further, the example of FIG. 138 is data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol. The delimiter to the end code is data for one frame. For example, the data from the first line to the tenth line is the data for the first frame. In addition, numerical values such as coordinate data and size data simply describe values that are meaningful in the present embodiment, and may include data including information after the decimal point. Actually, the data is a fixed decimal with a 16-bit sign (a 2's complement of a sign bit, an integer part 13 bits, and a fraction part 2 bits).
If the same state as the previous frame is continued, only the end code needs to be defined.

The types and meanings of the motion table commands in this example are as follows.
"Additional code": A command to add (register) an object. There are an additional 1 code, an additional 2 code, and an additional 3 code, respectively, according to the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle).
“Insert code”: a command for inserting an object as a specific object index. Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are an insertion 1 code, an insertion 2 code, and an insertion 3 code. By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index of the already registered object is lost.
"Move code": A command that specifies the display position and display size of an object. Depending on the designation method (one point designation, three point designation), there are movement 1 code and movement 2 code.
"Effect code": A command that commands an effect that applies transparency or other processing to the image. There are an effect 1 code for specifying an effect type, an effect 2 code for specifying an effect parameter (for example, a transparency value (%)), and an effect 3 code for specifying an effect color.
"Delete code": A command to command deletion of an object.
"Change code": a command for instructing a change in which an object character (such as a symbol or a character) continues to move in the middle of movement and remains unchanged.
"Decode code": A command for instructing decoding (decoding) of moving image data.
“Replacement code”: a command for instructing replacement of objects (for example, control for switching characters of object index 0 and object index 1).
"Behavior code": A command to command replacement of an object character.
"Copy code": a command for cutting out and copying (copying) and displaying a part of an image (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle) of an existing object registered by the additional code or insertion code. In this embodiment, there is a copy 2 code that cuts out a moving image into a rectangular shape. In addition, for example, there may be a copy 1 code that cuts out a bitmap that is a still image, or there may be a copy code that is cut out in a triangular shape or a circular shape instead of a rectangular shape.
“Inverted code”: a command for displaying an image obtained by inverting an image (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle) of an existing object registered by the additional code or the insertion code. In this embodiment, there is an inversion 2 code that inverts a moving image in the left-right direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction). In addition, for example, there may be an inversion 1 code that inverts a bitmap that is a still image in the left-right direction (horizontal direction, X-coordinate direction), or an inversion that inverts in the vertical direction (vertical direction, Y-coordinate direction). There may be code.
“End code”: a command indicating the end of data for one frame.
Note that the motion table commands are not limited to those described above, and may include a mode in which commands other than those described above are further included, or a mode in which any of the above commands is deleted.

Next, the processing after step D823 will be described.
After step D823, the process proceeds to step D824, and loop processing with steps D824 and D846 as loop ends is repeatedly executed until an end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration or the like, the command position k in the target motion management area X is set to 0 (value specifying the first row of the motion table) by the above-described steps D658, D663, and D815 (k = 0), each time the loop process of steps D824 to D846 is repeated, the value of the command position k in the motion management area X is increased by 1 (k = k + 1) in steps D845 and D880, which will be described later, and the above end condition in step D844 It is determined whether (command at the command position k is an end command) is established, and if established, the process returns via step D846, and if not established, the process returns to step D824 via step D846 and proceeds to step D825. It has become.

Hereinafter, Step D825 and the subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the command position value of the target motion management area X is k.
Proceeding to step D825, the row corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (the motion table at the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first row if k = 0, the second row if k = 1, ... if k = N, the command of the (N + 1) th line) is acquired, and then in step D826 to D843, command determination is sequentially performed to determine whether or not each code corresponds, and any command determination result is YES Then, the corresponding process (any of steps D851 to D868) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D846.

That is, it is determined in step D826 that the code is an additional code. If YES, a bitmap addition process (a process for adding a still image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D851, and then the process proceeds to step D846. Proceed to
In step D827, it is determined whether the code is an additional 2 code. If YES, an activation addition process (a process of adding a moving image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D852, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D828.
In step D828, it is determined whether the code is an additional 3 code, and if YES, a monochrome rectangle addition process (a process of adding a monochrome rectangle image that does not use character ROM (image ROM 322) data as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D853. The process proceeds to step D846 later, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether it is an insertion 1 code. If YES, a bitmap insertion process (a process of inserting a still image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D854, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D830. move on.

In step D830, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 2 code. If YES, a moving image insertion process (processing for inserting a moving image as an object, details omitted) is performed in step D855, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 3 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing a monochrome rectangle insertion process (a process of inserting the monochrome color image as an object, details are omitted) in step D856. Proceed to D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether or not the code is a movement code. If YES, a one-point designated object movement process (a process for setting the display position and display size of an object using a one-point designation method, details will be described later) is performed in step D857. The process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D833.
In step D833, it is determined whether the code is a movement 2 code. If YES, a 3-point designated object movement process (a process for setting the display position and display size of the object using the 3-point designation method, details are omitted) is performed. The process proceeds to step D846 later, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether it is an effect 1 code. If YES, effect type designation processing (described later) is performed in step D859, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D835.
In step D835, it is determined whether it is an effect 2 code. If YES, effect parameter designation processing (described later) is performed in step D860, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D836.
In step D836, it is determined whether it is an effect 3 code. If YES, an effect color designation process (effect color setting process, details are omitted) is performed in step D861, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether the code is a deletion code. If YES, an object deletion process (processing to delete an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D862, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the code is a change code. If YES, an object change process (object change process, details will be described later) is performed in step D863, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether the code is a decode code. If YES, an object moving image decoding process (details will be described later) is performed in step D864, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether the code is a replacement code. If YES, an object replacement process (object replacement process, details omitted) is performed in step D865, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether it is a behavior code. If YES, a behavior index setting process (details will be described later) is performed in step D866, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D842.

  In step D842, it is determined whether the code is a copy 2 code. If YES, rectangular copy processing (processing for cutting out and displaying a part of an object (moving image) and displaying details is omitted) in step D867 is followed by step D846. If so, the process proceeds to step D843. When this rectangular copying process is executed, a part specified by a parameter attached to the copy 2 code in the line at the command position k in one frame image of the target object (moving image) will be described later, for example. The designated image in the character drawing process in step E58 is rendered in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer of the VDP 312) in step E76, which will be described later. Such a copying process can be similarly performed when the object is a still image.

In step D843, it is determined whether the code is inverted 2 code, and if YES, after performing horizontal inversion processing (processing for inverting the object (moving image) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) and displaying it, details are omitted) in step D868. The process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D844. When this horizontal inversion processing is executed, a setting processing (for example, step E71 in FIG. 128 described later) for performing horizontal flip is executed on one frame image of the target object (moving image). (For example, the X coordinate values of the upper left display point and the upper right display point are exchanged so that the width data calculated in step E65 in FIG. 128, which will be described later, becomes a negative value). An image obtained by inverting one frame image of the object (moving image) in the horizontal direction is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later. Note that such inversion processing is also possible when the object is a still image.
Further, the direction of the inversion process can be the vertical direction (up and down direction). Set the code (motion command) to invert the vertical direction, and if it is this code, vertical inversion processing (processing to invert the object in the vertical direction (up and down direction) and display, details are omitted) May be configured to be executed. When this vertical inversion process is executed, a setting process (for example, step E75 in FIG. 128 to be described later) for performing vertical flip is set to be performed on the image of the target object (for example, to be described later). 128. The Y coordinate values of the display upper left point and the display lower left point are exchanged so that the height data calculated in step E66 in FIG. 128 becomes a negative value. The image reversed to is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later.

Next, in step D844, it is determined whether it is an end code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D845, and even if NO, the process proceeds to step D845.
In step D845, an update for increasing the value of the command position k by 1 is executed, and the flow proceeds to step D846.
In Step D846, if the determination result in Step D844 is YES, the process returns. If NO, the process returns to Step D824 to execute Step D825 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing of steps D824 to D846 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 as follows.
That is, first, since the command position k = 0 and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is determined in step D826, and the bitmap adding process in step D851 is executed. The symbol “2” on the line is registered as the object index 0.
Next, k = 1, the second line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index 0 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 0 (that is, the symbol “2”).

Next, k = 2 and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D826, and the bitmap adding process in the step D851 is executed, and the third line is present. The symbol “1” is registered as the object index 1.
Next, k = 3, the fourth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index 1 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is YES, and the behavior in step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 1 (that is, the symbol “1”).

Next, k = 4, and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result of step D826 is YES, and the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and the fifth line is present. The symbol “9” is registered as the object index 2.
Next, k = 5, and the sixth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index 2 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is YES, and the behavior in step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 2 (that is, the symbol “9”).

Next, since k = 6, the 7th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 0 or the like is set as the parameter. Therefore, YES is set in step D832, and one point is specified in step D857. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 0 (that is, the symbol “2”) according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the seventh row is performed.
Next, since k = 7, the 8th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 1 or the like is set as the parameter. Therefore, YES is set in step D832, and one point is designated in step D857. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 1 (that is, the pattern “1”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the eighth row.

Next, since k = 8, the 9th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 2 and the like are set as the parameters. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 2 (that is, the symbol “9”) according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the ninth row is performed.
Next, k = 9, and the 10th line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D844, the loop process is ended in the step D846, and the process returns.
In this way, the first frame shown by (a) in FIG. 138 is completed. It should be noted that the third and subsequent frames indicated by (b), (c), and (d) in the figure are similarly executed every frame period (the aforementioned processing period; for example, 1/30 second).

[Bitmap addition processing]
Next, details of the bitmap addition process executed in step D851 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a still image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D871, the address of the motion list table (that is, the data for specifying the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then, the process proceeds to Step D872.
Proceeding to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements. If there is, step D873 to D881 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. Here, the maximum number of display elements is the limit value of the number of displays (number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled in one motion in consideration of the hardware limit of the VDP 312 and the capacity of the VRAM 329 (area for expanding the moving image, etc.). For example, it is set to 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  In step D873, an address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set. For example, when an object is added for the first time, since the number of displays is 1, an address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. Specifically, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (the motion management area for the left symbol) is 3 for the first next symbol, the second current symbol, and the third previous symbol. There are pieces. Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position k = 0, the command on the first line which is the designated line is This routine is executed because it is an additional one code. In this case, among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the first display information area for the next symbol corresponding to the display number 1 is displayed in the display information area. Since the data of the object (character No. (symbol “2”)) specified by the parameter on the first line is set, in step D873, the address of the display information area for the first next symbol is set. Is set. Similarly, if k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the character No. 3 in the third line is displayed in the second display information area for the current symbol corresponding to the display number 2. (Symbol “1”) is set, the address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set, and k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line), corresponding to the display number 3 The character No. 5 in the fifth line is displayed in the display information area for the third previous symbol. The data of (symbol “9”) is set, and the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set.

  The “display number” set (saved) in the motion management area basically represents the MAX number of objects to be displayed (that is, the number of all objects set as control targets). In such additional processing, the number of objects increases, so the “display number” fluctuates by +1 (for example, updated in step D881 to be described later), but when such additional processing is no longer performed. The display number indicates the MAX number of the displayed object.

Next, in step D874, each data in one display information area (hereinafter referred to as a target display information area) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to zero. This is because once the values of the target display information area are all set to 0, initial values are set in necessary areas. Here, only one display information area corresponding to the number of displays is cleared to zero.
Next, in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area. This is for setting the state without behavior as an initial value. In this example, even when the value of the behavior index is 0 (when behavior index 0 is specified as the parameters in the second, fourth, and sixth lines in FIG. 138), the behavior (replacement of symbols, etc.) is not present. is there.

In step D876, still image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, in step D877, the motion table address (motion table name) is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D871). This is the same processing as in step D823 described above.

In step D878, a still image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the still image index is a registration number of a still image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of a still image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 133, for example. . Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position k = 0, the designated row is designated by the first row. The object with character no. In step D878, “1” is acquired as the value of the still image index for designating the row corresponding to the symbol “2” in the table of FIG. 133.
In step D879, the still image index value acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index. The image index is information indicating a specific character (an image such as a still image or a moving image) as a display target, and is information used in step E51 or the like in an effect display editing process described later.

Next, in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record. That is, an update is performed to increase the value k of the command position by 1. This is because when the motion command execution process is executed in the next cycle, the next row of the motion table is controlled as the designated row.
Next, in step D881, since an object is added by this routine, an update is performed to increase the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1, and then the process returns.

The contents of each parameter of the still image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 133 are as follows.
Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address where palette data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. In this example, since the described character uses the same palette, all are 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the palette may be changed as required by the character. Locations using different pallets will have different offset values.
-Image width and height; represents the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixel. In this example, since only the character at the time of normal fluctuation and the character of the push button are only the same size, in actuality, there are various values for each character. Also, even in normal symbols, for example, the size of the person drawn on the symbol may be slightly different, and the size of the appearance may be different. Adjust the height and set the characters to the same size if they are in the same category.

Width on VRAM; indicates the width when the character is expanded in VRAM. In this example, only the “reversible compression 32-bit image” is used as the compression type, so the width is the same as the original image. If lossy compression is used or the number of bits in the color palette is reduced, the size will be reduced.
Image compression type: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. Examples of the compression type include the following types 0 to 6. There may be other types.
0: No 32-bit full color image compression 1: No 8 bit full color image compression 2: No 4 bit full color image compression 3: Lossless compression 32 bit full color image 4: Lossless compression 8 bit full color image 5: Lossless compression 4 bit full color image 6: Lossless compression image / image The compressed size of image data (character data) after compression. It is used as a parameter when data is transferred from the character ROM 322 to the VRAM 329.
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition processing]
Next, details of the moving image addition process executed in step D852 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this routine is a process for adding a moving image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D891, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded, and the flow advances to step D892.
When the process proceeds to step D892, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum display element number as in step D872. If YES, steps D893 to D897 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D898.

In step D893, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set as in step D873.
In step D894, as in step D874, each data in one display information area (target display information area) specified by the address set in step D893 is cleared to zero.
In step D895, as in step D875, an undefined value (eg, “−1”) is saved as the behavior index value in the target display information area.
In Step D896, as in Step D877, the address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in Step D891).

  In Step D897, a moving image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the moving image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 134, for example. If the parameter of the object in the designated row of the target motion table (data set in the next column of the additional two codes) is, for example, the animation symbol “1”, the table in FIG. 134 is displayed in step D897. In “”, “0” is acquired as the value of the moving image index for designating the line corresponding to the animation symbol “1”.

  Next, in step D898, the encoding type (described later) data in the designated row of the moving image ROM member list table corresponding to the moving image index value acquired in step D897 is read, and the encoding of the moving image to be added based on this data is read. It is determined whether the type is an I picture moving image. If the type is an I picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D899. If the type is not an I picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D904. In the case of FIG. 134, since the encoded type data is “0”, it is an I picture moving image. Therefore, when this data is “0”, the process proceeds to step D899, and when other than “0”, the process proceeds to step D904. Become. Note that the I picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded independently without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I picture moving picture means a moving picture composed of only I pictures.

Next, when the process proceeds to Step D899, Steps D899 to D901 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D902.
In Step D899, the initial value “−1” is set as data of the frame count number for I picture in the target display information area (frame count at the time of moving picture of only I picture). If “−1” is set as the initial value, the frame count for I picture starts from “0”.
In step D900, I picture moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I picture moving image is set.
In step D901, the moving image index value acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D904, steps D904 and D905 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D906.
In step D904, a loop reproduction flag is set in order to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image. It is also possible to set so as not to loop.
In step D905, a moving image decoding area securing process for securing a storage area of the RAM 311a for decoding moving image data is executed.
In step D906, it is determined whether the area has been correctly allocated as a result of the video decoding area securing process. If YES, steps D907 and D908 are executed, and the process advances to step D902. If NO, the process returns. Note that if the area cannot be properly secured due to overcapacity or the like, the answer is NO.
In step D907, the normal moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving image (that is, not an I picture moving image) is set here.
In step D908, the index value of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index.

Next, when proceeding to Step D902, Steps D902 and D903 are executed in sequence and then the process returns.
In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In step D903, as in step D881, updating is performed to increase the value of the display number in the motion management area X by one.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 134 are as follows.
Movie address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
-Width and height of the movie: Indicates the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixel. As in the case of still images, the size of movies in the same category is adjusted with the transparent portion so as to be the same.
-Number of frames of moving image: Indicates how many continuous pictures the movie is composed of. In this embodiment, since 1 second = 30 frames of control, a movie is created in consideration of this. If the control is executed so as to be 60 frames per second, double speed reproduction is performed. The reverse is also true.

Α value setting: Information indicating whether the movie includes alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha present. If you have alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. If not, it is only opaque.
-Encoding type: Indicates how the movie is structured. There are the following types 0-2.
0 = Configuration only with I picture 1 = Configuration including I picture and one reference P picture (P-picture is created by referring to one previous I-picture or P-picture)
2 = a configuration including two P reference pictures in addition to the above 1 (refer to two past I or P and two past I or P to create the P picture)
However, the encoding type is not limited to the above, and a configuration including a B picture, for example, may be used.
In addition, the category setting of the moving image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[One-point specified object movement processing]
Next, details of the one-point designated object moving process executed in step D857 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D911 to D924 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D911, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded.
In step D912, the address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D911).

In step D913, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D912. For example, FIG. 138 shows the target motion table, and if k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), this command is executed because the command is the movement 1 code. In this case, the 7th line Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D913.
In step D914, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D913 is set. For example, when k = 6 in FIG. 138 (the designated row is the seventh row), the object index 0 is the symbol “2” (next symbol) added in the first row, so the first symbol corresponding to the next symbol is displayed. The address of the display information area is set.

In step D915, X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D916, the X coordinate acquired in step D915 is used as the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the X coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D914, hereinafter the same in this routine). Save the coordinate data.
In step D917, Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D918, the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper right display point in the target display information area.

In step D919, image width data and image height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired.
In step D920, the image width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915, and in the next step D921, the addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area. .
In step D922, the image height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917. In the next step D923, the addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area. To do.
In step D924, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  According to the steps D915 to D923, the following operation is realized. For example, when k = 6 in FIG. 138 (the designated row is the seventh row), the X coordinate data is “0”, the Y coordinate data is “−493” (minus indicates the position outside the screen on the upper side of the screen), image The width data is “296” and the image height data is “490”. Therefore, “0” is acquired in step D915, “−493” is acquired in step D917, and “296” and “490” are acquired in step D919. The addition result in step D920 is “296” (= 0 + 296), and the addition result in step D922 is “−3” (= −493 + 490). Accordingly, in step D916, “0” is saved as the X coordinate of the upper left display point and the lower left display point, and “−493” is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the upper right display point in step D918. Then, “296” is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point, and “−3” is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in step D923. As a result, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol “2”) is set as three coordinates (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point). In this case, the position of the upper left corner on the screen is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and all the Y coordinates set as described above are negative values. The display position is set outside the screen on the upper side of the screen, and the next design image is not yet visible on the screen.

As described above, according to this routine, although one point is designated, three points are designated as a result. This is because the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, so if there are the upper left reference point coordinates and the object height and width data, the upper right point and lower left point as in steps D920 and D922 above. This is because the coordinates are obtained. As described above, in the display information area in the motion management area, there are areas into which the coordinate values of the three points determined in this way are entered. In steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, registration in each area is performed. .
The three-point designated object moving process executed in step D858 in the motion command execution process described above will not be described in detail with reference to a flowchart, but this process is also substantially the same as the one-point designated object moving process described above. To be done. However, in the case of specifying 3 points, each coordinate data is on the motion table, so the addition processing as in steps D920 and D922 described above is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table are all intact. The processing contents are simply saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification processing]
Next, details of the effect type designation process executed in step D859 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D931 to D940 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D931, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded.
In Step D932, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in Step D931).

In step D933, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D932. For example, if Mdat0041 (motion index No. 41) on the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line), this command is executed because the command is the effect 1 code. However, in this case, since the object index of k = 4 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D933.
In step D934, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D933 is set. For example, in the case of the lower side of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is the moving image “Torataro Movie 1” added with k = 0 (first line), and the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In step D935, data of the effect type corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D936, the data acquired in step D935 is saved as the effect type in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D934, the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 4 on the lower side of FIG. 149, the effect type is (1). Therefore, this is acquired in step D935 and set in the target display information area in step D936.
Next, in steps D937, D938, and D939, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared.
In step D940, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  In this routine described above, for example, the type of blending method for displaying a plurality of objects in a superimposed manner is set. That is, for example, the effect type (1) is a kind of effect that imparts transparency (transparency), and the effect that imparts transparency is the same as the image of the rear (back side) layer that overlaps at the same display position. It can be said that it is a process of blending (blending) with the image of the layer. In this routine, the type of blending is set.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, details of the effect parameter designation processing executed in step D860 in the motion command execution processing described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D941 to D947 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D941, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D942, the address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D941).

In step D943, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D942. For example, if the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 5 (the designated line is the sixth line), this command is executed because the command is the effect 2 code. In this case, k = 5 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D943.
In step D944, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D943 is set. For example, in the case of the lower side of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is the moving image “tiger taro movie 1” added with k = 0 (first line), and therefore the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set. .

In step D945, the effect parameter data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D946, the data acquired in step D945 is saved as an effect parameter in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D944, the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 5 on the lower side of FIG. 151, since the effect parameter is (64), this is acquired in step D945 and set in the target display information area in step D946.

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object when blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in this example, data obtained by converting the percentage of transparency into a numerator of “P / 255” is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is normal display (no transparency), the parameter P for displaying at a density of about 10% is 25 (≈255 × 10/100). Conversely, as in the above-described specific example, the transparency when the value of the parameter P is 64 is about 25% (= 100 × 64/255), which is considerably thin. However, when the 100% display is performed, the effect type designation process described above and the effect parameter designation process which is this routine are not executed.
Next, in step D947, the command position is updated to the next record, as in step D880.

[Object deletion processing]
Next, details of the object deletion process executed in step D862 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D951, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded.
Next, at step D952, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less. If not, the process proceeds to step D953.
When the process proceeds to Step D953, Steps D953 to D955 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D956.
In step D953, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D951).

In step D954, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D953. For example, if the lower side of FIG. 142 is the target motion table and k = 12 (the designated line is the 13th line), this command is executed because the command is a deletion code. In this case, however, k = 12 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D954.
In step D955, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D954 is set. For example, when k = 12 on the lower side of FIG. 142, since the object index is 0, the address of the display information area corresponding to the object index 0 is set at this time.

In step D956, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving picture information. If it is normal moving picture information, the moving picture decoding area release process (details omitted) is executed in step D957. The process proceeds to D958, and if it is not normal moving image information (ie, if it is an I picture moving image), the process proceeds to Step D958 without executing Step D957.
When the process proceeds to Step D958, Steps D958 to D960 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index is shifted (moved) forward. That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted to the previous display information area by one. As a result, the data in the display information area at the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data is deleted.
In step D959, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In step D960, since the object is deleted by this routine, an update for reducing the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1 is executed.

[Object change processing]
Next, details of the object change process executed in step D863 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D961 to D967 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D961, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D962, the motion table address is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D961).
In step D963, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D962.

In step D964, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D963 is set.
In step D965, the index (the still image index or the moving image index described above) of the changed character (character after the change) corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table is acquired.
In step D966, the index value acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index. Thereby, the object change which changes only an image (characters, such as a symbol and a character) is implement | achieved.
In step D967, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, details of the object moving image decoding process executed in step D864 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D971 to D974 are sequentially executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step D975.
In step D971, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D972, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D971).

In step D973, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D972. For example, if the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 3 (the designated line is the fourth line), this command is executed because the command is a decode code. In this case, Since the object index of k = 3 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D973.
In step D974, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D973 is set. For example, when k = 3 in the table on the upper side of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is a moving image (tiger taro movie 1) added with k = 0 (first row), so the display information area corresponding to this moving image. Address is set.

In step D975, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is I picture moving picture information. If it is I picture moving picture information, the process advances to step D979 after executing steps D977 and D978. If not, the process proceeds to Step D976.
In step D977, the address of the area of the frame count number for I picture (frame count for moving picture only of I picture) in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D974, hereinafter the same in this routine) Set.
In step D978, based on the address set in step D977, updating is performed to increase the data of the I picture frame count in the target display information area by one.

In step D979, it is determined whether the I-picture frame count updated in step D978 is equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to the image index data at this time). If so, the process proceeds to step D983 after executing step D980, and if it is not greater than the number of moving image frames, the process proceeds to step D983 without executing step D980.
In step D980, since the moving image designated by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) has been displayed up to the last frame, the I picture frame count number in the target display information area is set to restart the moving image from the beginning. Set the data to 0 (start value).

In step D976, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If it is normal moving image information, the flow advances to step D983 after executing steps D981 and D982. Returns as abnormal.
In step D981, the data registered as the image index at this time (in this case, the moving image index data) is loaded.
In step D982, moving image decoding processing (details omitted) for decoding (decoding) one frame of moving images corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is executed.
In step D983, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In the case of an I picture moving image, since the picture of each frame exists independently, the number of frames may be managed. When an instruction is given later to the internal register of the VDP 312, the count (I-picture frame count) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting process]
Next, details of the behavior index setting process executed in step D866 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D991 to D997 are first executed sequentially, and then the process returns.
In step D991, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D992, the motion table address is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D991). As shown in FIG. 135 as an example, the behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

In step D993, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D992. For example, if the upper side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 1 (the designated line is the second line), this command is executed because the command is a behavior code, but in this case, k = 1 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D993.
In step D994, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D993 is set. For example, in the case of the upper side of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is a moving image (tiger taro movie 1) added with k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In Step D995, behavior index data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D996, the data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D994, hereinafter the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149, the behavior index is (0), so this is acquired in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
In step D997, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  The behavior table is a table (a data table registered in the PROM 321) that includes a line in which a processing address of a behavior (character replacement) is set, and specifies a specific line (specified line) of the lines. Is the behavior index. Therefore, when the values of the behavior table and the behavior index are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined and the contents of the behavior are specified. This routine performs control processing for designating the contents of such behavior. For example, the second line with k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149 instructs the object (object replacement) of the object index 0 to execute the behavior (character replacement) specified by the behavior index 0. Therefore, the target information display area is set according to this. The behavior specified by the behavior index 0 is, for example, changing the color of the notice character “tiger taro” appearing in the movie for the big hit reliability notification, or changing the kind of notice character from “tiger taro” to “ The control is replaced with “Torasusuke” (see FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c) described later).

[Direction display edit processing]
Next, details of the effect display editing process executed in step D31 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 125, 126, and 127. FIG. In the following, step E is used as the step number. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed for the number of motion management areas, and then the process returns. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop process A, first, X = 0 and the process is executed from the step E2 for the motion management area X (ie, the motion management area 0 at the beginning). X = X + 1), it is determined whether or not the loop processing A has been completed for all motion management areas in the next step E50 (in this example, X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is YES. If NO (that is, if the end condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the process returns. If NO, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the process after step E2 is demonstrated.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL. If it is NULL, control is not necessary for the motion management area X, and the process proceeds to step E49. After the execution, go to Step E6. If it is determined as NULL (YES) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are naturally not executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared.
In step E4, all blend information areas are cleared. The blend information area is an area in the RAM 311a that stores information on parameters of the internal register of the VDP 312 for comparison between old and new. In other words, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value during blending for effects. An area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information is provided in the RAM 311a for each of the four types of parameters, and this is a blend information area.
In step E5, inter-pixel calculation parameters (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal register of the VDP 312) are set.

  Next, when proceeding to Step E6, the loop process B is started. In the loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until the final value (the final value = the number of displays−1), and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E7. In step E48, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E6, and if the variable i is greater than or equal to the closing price, the process proceeds to step E49. Then, when returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E7. Note that the closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area X. That is, in this loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for this number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

Hereinafter, the process after step E7 is demonstrated.
When the process proceeds to step E7, steps E7 to E9 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E10.
In step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of the VDP 312 is set corresponding to the α value.
In step E8, an α flag used for processing to be described later is set to α.
In step E9, the address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as the target display information area) corresponding to the variable i in the motion management area X is loaded.
Next, when proceeding to Step E10, the value of the behavior index in the display information area of the address loaded at Step E9 is read to determine whether any index data other than NULL is set, and some behavior index data is set. If YES (YES), the process corresponding to the behavior index is executed in step E11, and then the process proceeds to step E12. If NO, the process proceeds to step E12 without executing step E11.

Note that the process corresponding to the behavior index executed in step E11 is to execute the behavior (replacement of image data) specified by the behavior index for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This processing is specified by the processing address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the behavior table described above.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the processing of the flowchart shown on the left side of FIG. 129 (display left symbol conversion processing) described later is executed in step E11. In the present application, a specific example of the process executed in step E11 is also shown on the right side of FIG. 129. Details thereof will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the image index data is changed immediately before display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the push button (PB) image is changed from the basic color. It may be replaced with a predetermined color (for example, a specific color representing the big hit reliability) according to the gaming state. Since the display pattern of the character defined on the motion table is fixed, basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to cope with different stop symbols for each change or different notice characters due to distribution. . Therefore, in this example, a behavior can be flexibly handled by embedding a behavior in a necessary part and replacing the character.

  In step E12, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined in steps E12, E13, and E14 whether this is a basic blend, an addition blend, or a subtraction blend. If the blend type does not correspond to any blend type, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any blend type, steps E15 to E18 are skipped and the process proceeds to step E21.

In step E15, the effect parameter value set in the target display information area is loaded and applied to the color parameter, and then the process proceeds to step E16.
When the process proceeds to step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area whether the rendering designation is normal video non-transmission reproduction. If YES, the process proceeds to step E17. If NO, the process proceeds to step E17. Proceed to E21.
Proceeding to step E17, it is determined whether the target moving image (the one determined to be playback without transmission of the normal moving image at step E16) is registered without α. If YES, the α flag is set to α without α at step E18. Set and proceed to step E21. If NO, proceed to step E21 without executing step E18.

Next, when proceeding to Step E21, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is addition blend, subtraction blend, multiplication blend, screen blend, difference blend, comparison (darkness). ) Whether blending or inversion blending is determined in steps E21 to E27, respectively, and if corresponding to any blend type, the corresponding process (corresponding process among steps E31 to E37) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E39. If it does not correspond to any blend type, the process proceeds to Step E28.
Here, step E31 is a process executed in the case of addition blending (a process of setting an addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is a process executed in the case of subtraction blending (setting a subtraction type drawing effect). Step E33 is a process executed in the case of multiplication blending (a process for setting a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is a process executed in the case of screen blending (a screen type drawing effect). Step E35 is a process executed in the case of difference blending (a process of setting a difference type drawing effect), and step E36 is a process executed in the case of comparison (dark) blending (comparison). Step E37 is a process for setting a (dark) type drawing effect. Is a process executed when a command (processing for setting the drawing effect of inverting type).

Next, in step E28, it is determined whether the α flag is set to α. If α is absent, a drawing effect without α is set in step E29, and the flow proceeds to step E39. In the case of α, the drawing effect of α type is set in step E38, and the process proceeds to step E39.
In step E29 and steps E31 to E38, various parameters for blending (four types in this example) are set in the corresponding blend information area in accordance with the setting of the effect type and the like of the target information display area. Yes.

Next, when proceeding to Step E39, the loop processing C is started. In the loop process C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the variable j corresponding to the above-described four types of blend information areas is increased from the initial value 0 by 1 to the final value (final value = 3). Proceed to E44.
That is, in step E39, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable j is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E40.
In step E40, it is determined whether or not the blend information area corresponding to the variable j has been changed. If the blend information area has been changed, steps E41 and E42 are sequentially executed, and the process proceeds to step E43. Proceed to step E43 without executing E42. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining that the previous data and the current data in the corresponding blend information area have been changed if they do not match, and by determining that they have not been changed if they match.
In step E41, the inter-pixel calculation fixed value of the registration parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of the VDP 312. In step E42, the current blend information is set as the previous blend information.

In step E43, if the variable j is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E39. If the variable j is the closing price, the loop process C is exited and the process proceeds to step E44. Then, when returning to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why there are four ranges of the variable j is that, as described above, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value at the time of blending. In addition, the area corresponding to each register (blend information area) is provided for the previous time and this time, and the setting process of step E41 is performed only when the old and new data in this blend information area are compared and matched. This is because the value is set in the register of the VDP 312 only when the value to be changed changes (to make the setting process to the VDP more efficient).

Next, when proceeding to Step E44, the display type (display type) data set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined whether this is a still picture, a normal moving picture, an I picture moving picture or a monochromatic square. Each determination is made in E44 to 47, and corresponding processing (corresponding processing among steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) is executed if any of the display types excluding the single color rectangle is applicable. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step E58, and if it is a monochromatic square, the process proceeds to step E59, and if it does not correspond to any display type, the process proceeds to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image. In step E51, image index data is loaded. In step E52, attributes of still image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E52, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the setting in step E52.

Steps E53 and E54 are executed for a normal moving image. In step E53, image index data is loaded. In step E54, attributes of normal moving image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E54, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the setting in step E54.
Steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I picture moving image. In step E55, image index data is loaded. In step E56, an I picture frame count is read from the target display information area. In step E57, processing such as setting the attributes of I picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After step E57, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the setting in step E57.
Step E59 is executed in the case of a monochrome rectangle, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (monochromatic rectangle image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (ie, pasting the rectangular image sprite into the virtual drawing space) Processing).
Note that after step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

Next, when proceeding to Step E48, it is determined whether or not the variable i of the loop process B has reached the final value (the number of displays −1). If so, the process exits the loop process B and proceeds to Step E49. If not, the process returns to step E6 and loop processing B is repeated.
Then, when the process proceeds to step E49, an update for increasing the target motion management area number X by 1 is executed, and then in step E50, it is determined whether X has reached the final value of loop processing A (14 in this example). If so, return from loop processing A, and if not, return to step E1 and repeat loop processing A from step E2.

  In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, processing for transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 322) to the VRAM 329 is also performed at the same time. However, if the same VRAM already exists, this data transfer is not performed. In the case of a single-color square, the character ROM data is not used, so this data transfer is not necessary. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, an α mode, a color mode (how many colors are displayed), a character size, a color palette designation, and others.

[Character drawing process]
Next, details of the character drawing process executed in step E58 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step E61, the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the X coordinate of the lower left display point are obtained from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. It is read to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step E77.
In step E62, the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and it is determined whether or not they match. If not, the process proceeds to step E77.
If the image is a quadrilateral (rectangular) image, the determination result in steps E61 and E62 is YES and the process proceeds to step E63. If the image is a triangle character (triangle image), either determination is NO. Then, the process proceeds to Step E77.
In step E77, a triangle character drawing process (not described) is executed and the process returns.

Next, when the process proceeds to Step E63, Steps E63 to E67 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step E68.
In step E63, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the upper left base point X coordinate of the character.
In step E64, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the upper left base point Y coordinate of the character.
In step E65, the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between these (= X coordinate of the upper right display point−X of the upper left display point) Coordinate) is set as character width data.

In step E66, the data of the Y coordinate of the lower left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper left display point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= the Y coordinate of the lower left display point−the Y upper display point Y). Coordinate) is set as the height data of the character.
In step E67, no horizontal flip (inversion in the horizontal direction) and no vertical flip are set. Here, horizontal flip means image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and vertical flip means image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

In step E68, it is determined whether the width data set in step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If it is less than 0, there is a horizontal flip, so steps E69 to E71 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E72. If it is not less than 0, there is no horizontal flip, so the process proceeds to step E72 without executing steps E69 to E71.
In step E69, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the width data (minus value) set in step E65 to the upper left base point X of the character. Update setting as coordinates.
In step E70, the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted to a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data.
In step E71, the presence of horizontal flip is set (the setting in step E67 is changed).

In step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If it is less than 0, there is a vertical flip, so steps E73 to E75 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E76. If it is not less than 0, there is no vertical flip, so the process proceeds to step E76 without executing steps E73 to E75.
In step E73, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the height data (minus value) set in step E66 to this is obtained as the upper left base point of the character. Update setting as Y coordinate.
In step E74, the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data.
In step E75, the presence of vertical flip is set (the setting in step E67 is changed).
Then, when proceeding to step E76, an image of a predetermined character corresponding to the data of the image index loaded in any one of the steps E51, E53, E55 based on the setting by the processing so far (steps E63 to E75). Is executed as a designated image in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, processing for pasting a sprite of a predetermined character into the virtual drawing space), and then the process returns.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps E81 to E83 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E84.
In step E81, image index data (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded.
In step E82, the data of the index (symbol number) of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (for example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded. In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the index (symbol number) data of the symbols (decorative symbols of special symbols) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

  In step E83, the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the index data of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and the addition result is updated. Set as an index. For example, if the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is 0 and the index data of the current symbol (left) to be replaced loaded in step E82 is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the update index value.

Next, when proceeding to step E84, it is determined whether or not the data of the update index set at step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example). If not, the process proceeds to Step E86 without executing Step E85.

In step E85, a value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the update index value, and this subtraction result is set as a new update index value. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the symbol upper limit, the value of the update index is updated to a value that makes a round.

In step E86, the left symbol index conversion table is set, and the flow advances to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the update index, and the value of the image symbol of the left symbol to be displayed in the designated row is set.
In step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row specified by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86, and the process proceeds to step E88.
In step E88, the value acquired in step E87 is saved in the image index area (area for saving the image index) as a new image index value, and then the process returns.
In addition, although the display left symbol conversion process was demonstrated above, there exists the same process also about a right symbol and a middle symbol (details are abbreviate | omitted).

[PB color conversion processing]
Next, details of the PB color conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the upper right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, the process returns after executing steps E91 to E94 sequentially.
In step E91, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area (area storing the distribution result (notice type) determined in steps D426 and D429 described above).
In step E92, a PB index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E93. The PB index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the PB color area, and an image index value of a PB (push button) image to be displayed in the designated row is set. .

In step E93, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92, and the process proceeds to step E94.
In step E94, the value acquired in step E93 is saved in the image index area as a new image index value, and then the process returns.
In addition, as the motion control data (especially the image index data) for the push button notice, only the button character that becomes the default color is registered, so when changing the color from the default color for notification of the big hit reliability, This routine (PB color conversion process) is executed.
In addition to the push button notice, the basic character that appears (for example, “tiger taro”) is assigned to another character (for example, “tiger suke” or “tiger lock”) corresponding to the result of distribution in the effect distribution result area. Similarly, there is processing such as conversion (replacement) by behavior.

[Reach character conversion processing]
Next, details of the reach character conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the lower right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps E101 to E103 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E104.
In step E101, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E102, a reach character index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E103. The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the reach character area, and an image index value of a reach character image to be displayed on the designated row is set.
In step E103, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102. Although not shown, the value acquired in step E103 is also saved in a predetermined image index area as a new image index value.

In step E104, it is determined whether the reach character index obtained in step E103 is a value indicating "no character". If YES, the character (image) size of the reach character is set to 0 in step E105. Return later, and if NO, return without executing step E105.
In this example, the motion control data (especially for reach characters such as “reach!”, “Warplane”, “win”, “reach”, “daze ~!”) In the image index data), a default character is displayed. If necessary, a behavior is displayed by a behavior (that is, by setting the reach character conversion process in step E11 as necessary) immediately before display. Change the character or change the color of each character.
Further, in the reach character conversion processing described above, for example, when the reliability of the jackpot notice changes with low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105, so that the reach character is actually present in the control. The control is invisible. However, the method of not displaying may not be limited to this configuration, for example, a configuration that does not display reach characters.

[Specification of data table for effect control and effect display]
Next, a specific example of the data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above, a specific example of the effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen, display area) of the display device 41 by the same control, etc. 133 to 165 will be described.
First, FIG. 133 shows a specific example of the still image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D878 of the bitmap addition process.
Next, FIG. 134 shows a specific example of the moving image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D897 of the moving image addition process.
Next, FIG. 135 is a specific example of a motion list table. This motion list table has already been explained in the explanation part of the scenario analysis process (specifically, the part explained about the motion index).

Next, FIG. 136 is a specific example of the scenario table (during customer waiting demonstration), and has already been described in the step D585 of the scenario analysis process, the constant weight process, the repetition process, and the like.
Next, FIG. 137 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of special fluctuation in FIG. 1), and has already been described in step D586 of the scenario analysis process.

Next, FIG. 138 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of starting the left symbol normal fluctuation), which has already been described in step D823 and the like of the motion command execution process.
In the motion table control, unless the motion deletion process or the new motion registration process is executed on the target motion layer, the head returns to the head when the table row reaches the bottom. That is, in the motion control process (step D30), when the control of the target motion table is completed up to the final frame (the frame number has reached the final frame number), the same motion table is used as in the motion registration. Is configured to be executed from the beginning again.
Next, FIG. 139 is an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG. 138.
As shown in this figure, since the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0) and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction, the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0 and Y coordinate = 767. Further, since the left and right direction in the display screen 41a is the X-axis direction, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y Coordinates = 767. In addition, the specific numerical value of such a coordinate is only an example.

  FIG. 139 (a) corresponds to the first frame (a) of the motion table. The symbol “2” including the image of the tiger character is the next symbol (object index 0), the symbol “1” is the current symbol (object index 1), and the symbol “9” is the symbol (object index 2). These objects are additionally registered in the first to sixth lines of the motion table, and the behavior is set. Also, the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the 7th to 9th lines of the motion table, respectively, whereby the display shown in FIG. 139 (a) is performed. However, the next symbol is not actually visible as it is entirely outside the screen, and only a part of the previous symbol is visible.

  FIG. 139 (b) corresponds to the second frame (b) of the motion table. The design and behavior of each object remain the same as the first frame (a), and the display position and size of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th lines of the motion table. The display shown in (b) is performed. In this case, the values of the Y coordinate are all changed by -8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the current symbol of the object index 1 is changed from the Y coordinate value of 7 to -1). The symbol has moved slightly upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement of once hopping in the operation of scrolling (fluctuating) downward after each symbol once hops (slightly rises) at the start of fluctuation. In the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) of the motion table (FIG. 138), the Y coordinate is sequentially changed by -8.

Next, the upper side of FIG. 140 shows the state of the initial position of each symbol (the state at the top except for the hopping operation described above), which is the same display as in FIG. 139 (a).
Further, the lower side of FIG. 140 shows a state in which each symbol is scrolled to the bottom of the movement range.
The movement (scrolling) of the display position as a variable display of each symbol is performed within the range of the two states described above.
For example, when the current symbol reaches the bottom of the movement range, the next time, the symbol number is updated (+1), and the value returns to the initial value of the movement range. In this example, three symbols (when considering not the symbol number but the current symbol / previous symbol / next symbol) are only moving repeatedly within each narrow effective range. Since the symbol number is incremented by 1 when returning to the top (that is, for example, the symbol “1” is switched to the symbol “2”), it appears that the same symbol is scrolling from the upper part of the screen to the lower part of the screen.

When the y-coordinate fluctuates at a rate of adding by 100, the current symbol is fluctuated and controlled by the values of 7 → 107 → 207 → 307 → 407 → 7 → 107 →. The symbol number displayed when it becomes 7 is incremented by one. The same applies to the previous symbol and the next symbol of the left symbol, and the same applies to the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol.
As an advantage of this method, it is easy to determine how many symbol numbers are currently the center of control. In the example of FIG. 140, it can be relatively calculated that the symbol number “1” is the center, the previous symbol is “9” immediately before it, and the next symbol is “2” after it. When the coordinates return to the top, the control symbol can be narrowed down to one, such as “2” as the central symbol, so that the structure can be simplified.
This is not a method of dividing “current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol”, but if it is a technique to move the same symbol from top to bottom, each will exist as three independent symbols. However, in this example, such a problem can be solved.
The above-mentioned range division is a case of normal fluctuation. This is not the case during reach (during reach action), as the position of the symbol changes in various ways. However, the concept of classification of the current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol, etc. remains even during reach.

  Next, FIG. 141 is a connection example of the motion table at the time of left symbol normal fluctuation. The connection of the motion tables is performed by the scenario table described above. First, in the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 0 is set by the 20th line (// 19) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 143 to be described later. This is set by designating the first line (left symbol stop). Then, by the motion table (Mdat0000), the symbol “1” is registered as the object index 0 (first row), and then this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (second row). ) Displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified in the third line. A motion table such as this motion table (Mdat0000) is registered in the table as a basic character so that only one pattern can be registered for the same movement even if the rendered character varies depending on the situation. The character with the lowest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in this case, the stop symbol “1”). According to this configuration, since the number with the lowest number in the internal control is used as a reference, it is easy to calculate a difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and control is easy and efficient. This has the effect of improving the development efficiency. In addition, since the motion table is registered only once for the same movement, there is an effect that an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

  Next, in the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 3 is set by the first line of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, and thereby the four lines of the motion list table of FIG. It is set by specifying the eye (left normal fluctuation (first half)). Then, similarly to the case described with reference to FIG. 138 described above, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are respectively registered by this motion table (Mdat0003), and the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol is displayed. 141 and FIG. 138 show the same motion table (Mdat0003).

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 4 is set by the fourth line of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137. It is set by specifying the eye (// 4 left normal fluctuation (second half)). Then, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered by this motion table (Mdat0004), and the normal variation (second half) of the left symbol is displayed.
Although only the left symbol has been described above, the same applies to the right symbol, the middle symbol, or other objects.
As described above, the scenario table can easily configure a series of long effects by freely combining a plurality of motion tables for designating blocked display effects.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of push button notice), and has already been described in the variable wait process, the PB wait process, the PB determination branch process, and the like.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of push button notice), and has already been described in step D823 of the motion command execution process and step D954 of the object deletion process.

Next, FIG. 143 is an example of a scenario table used at the time of ending the special display variable display effect.
Here, a symbol display period of a predetermined time is provided during the ending period so that the next symbol variation does not start suddenly at the end of the ending movie. In this example, a constant wait code is set in the 27th line (// 26), and the wait time value is 30 (that is, 1 second). As a result, the left, right and middle stop symbol displays registered for motion in the 20th line (// 19), 22nd line (// 21), and 24th line (// 23) are displayed for a predetermined time (in this example). Then, it continues for 1 second, and the next symbol variation does not start suddenly at the end of the ending movie.

  Also, since the motion index value is set to (−1) for the background setting of the 18th line (// 17) in FIG. 143, NO is obtained in step D637 of the motion registration process described above, and the motion index of the RAM is set. The region value is used as the motion index. This must match the background to be displayed after the end of the ending, but since no probability information command has been received at this point, it can be predicted from information such as already received symbol commands, fanfare commands, ending commands, etc. This is because the background needs to be selected. In addition, even if a command command of a probable variation symbol is sent from the game control device, there is a possibility that the production control device side will perform an effect of making it appear as a normal symbol (non-probable variation symbol), so not only the command This is because it is necessary to use the internal information of the production control device. Note that a probability information command is sent at the end of the ending scenario, but if there is no problem with the display content, it can be continued as it is, or if there is a problem, the background is switched to the background corresponding to the command ( The command from the game control device is the highest priority).

  Next, FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the display layer. Here, the display layer means a virtual layer (layer) that determines the context (display priority) of whether to display as the near side or the other side on the screen. In this embodiment, the above-described motion layer corresponds to a basic display layer. As described above, there are a total of 14 motion layers from the background motion 0 to the 4th symbol motion 13 and the images overlap at the same position (X coordinate and Y coordinate positions). In this case, the higher the motion number, the higher the priority. In other words, when images overlap at the same position, those with a small motion number (those with a small motion number) will have a large motion number at the overlapped portion unless the one with a large motion number is transparent or translucent. It appears hidden and disappears. FIG. 144 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the display layers corresponding to the motion layers.

In the case of the present embodiment, the display priority order of the motion layers is actually determined by the effect display editing process (FIGS. 125 to 127) described above. In the effect display editing processing described above, as described above, the processing is performed in order from the smallest motion layer number (that is, the motion number) (young one), and in this order, each image is displayed in the virtual drawing space of the VDP 312. This is because the image is drawn in (frame buffer).
FIG. 144 shows only the basic display layer classification corresponding to the motion layer. However, even in the same motion layer, the above-described object index is different, so that the display layer is further different. be able to. As described above, the smaller the object index value, the deeper the screen is displayed as the context of the display layer (that is, when the display position overlaps, the object with the larger object index value is given priority) Is displayed on the screen).

Next, FIG. 145 and FIG. 146 show images of effect information (information for effect different from the identification information) on the back side with respect to the image of the decorative symbol (that is, the symbol of the decorative special symbol; identification information). An example of a reach start effect is shown as a specific example of a series of effect displays overlapping the front side. In addition, the 4th symbol is usually always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and in some cases, a special display start memory hold display (including a special effect display by a pre-reading notice) is performed. The illustration is omitted to avoid complication.
In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), “7” as the left symbol KTL and “7” as the right symbol KTR of the decorative special symbol are displayed largely on both sides of the center of the screen 41a. Thereafter, the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR are gradually reduced in size on the screen, and after passing through the state shown in FIG. 145 (b) and then the state shown in FIG. 145 (c), shown in FIG. The display moves to the state. The dotted line with an arrow shown in FIG. 145 (a) illustrates the subsequent movement trajectory of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (the trajectory that moves to the upper corner after turning). (However, this may also be displayed as an effect).

  Then, when the images of the left symbol KTL (identification information) and the right symbol KTR (identification information) start to move, an image of the face of “tiger taro” as the character C7 (effect information image) appears on the screen 41a. A display is displayed that moves from the upper right side to the lower left side. At this time, the character C7 is displayed to partially overlap the right symbol KTR in the state of FIG. 145 (b) and to be in front of the right symbol KTR, and in the state of FIG. 145 (c), the character C7 and the right symbol KTL are displayed. The symbol KTR partially overlaps the symbol KTR and is displayed so as to be on the side facing the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (back side), thereby realizing a dynamic effect display. The dotted lines shown in FIG. 145 (b), FIG. 145 (c), and FIG. 146 (a) indicate the movement trajectory immediately before the character C7 and are not actually displayed on the screen 41a (however, this is also true). May be displayed as an effect).

  Further, in the state of FIG. 145 (c) where the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR and the character C7 are gathered and overlapped at the center (a state where the player gazes at the center), the preliminary lottery process (for example, the aforementioned steps D426 and D429). ), For example, the color of the character C7 changes temporarily (or continues thereafter) as shown in FIG. 146 (b), or the character C7 is different as shown in FIG. 146 (c). By changing the character C6 temporarily (or continuously thereafter), for example, a notice effect that suggests a reliability level that is a big hit is performed. In this way, if the reliability is suggested by the display content or display mode of the character or the like in a state where the image of the special figure (identification information) and the image of the character (effect information) overlap, the player suggests the reliability The possibility of missing the (pre-notification) effect is extremely low, and an effective display effect of the advance notice can be realized.

Note that the notice effect indicating the reliability is, for example, the character C7 by the behavior or the like in the case of a big hit, the contents of the data table of the notice distribution (the lottery of the notice contents for the notice) used in the aforementioned steps D426 and D429. What is necessary is just to set so that the probability that the color of (or changes to a specific color) increases. In this way, the player empirically feels that if the color of the character C7 changes (or changes to a specific color), it is likely that the player will easily win a big hit. Can be suggested. The same applies to other notice effects.
Even if the color of the character C7 does not change, the series of reach start effects themselves shown in FIGS. 145 (a), 145 (b), 145 (c), and 146 (a) are reliable. It may be performed as a preliminary announcement. Also in this case, for example, if the contents of the data table for drawing the contents of the effect are set so that the reach start effect is easily executed in the case of a big hit, if the reach start effect is executed, the player will win the big hit (That is, it is possible to suggest the jackpot reliability to the player).

Next, FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the state of each image and display layer in the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.
In the effect display, the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 on the front side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (b) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 147 (a). The image (production image) of the movie M1, which is a moving image of C7 as described above, is arranged in the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). At the same time, an image GM1 obtained by copying a part including the image of the character C7 (effect information) in the image of the movie M1 is displayed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) in front of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR. It arranges and controls so that the display position (X coordinate and Y coordinate position) of the character C7 in the image on the back side and the near side coincides. That is, the character C7 is drawn at the same position of the display layer before and after the decorative special design (display layers are motions 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn twice as a whole, but the front side is the back side. A part of the image is copied (copied). Since a part is copied, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and images on the back side (for example, images of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR) can be used without being translucent. There is an effect that it is possible to ensure the visibility of decorative drawings and the like without unnecessarily covering up.

  In the effect display, the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 on the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (c) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 147 (b). The image (production image) of the movie M1 is left arranged in the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information), and the left symbol KTL and the right symbol are displayed. The character C7 is not displayed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the near side of the KTR. That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the decorative special design (display layer is motions 5 to 7).

Next, FIGS. 148 and 149 are examples of a scenario table and a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 147.
The upper part of FIG. 148 is a scenario table (left design reach start effect) used for the left symbol KTL in scenario layer 1, and the middle part of FIG. 148 is the scenario table used for the right symbol KTR in scenario layer 2. 148 is the scenario table used for the character C7 in the scenario layer 4 (torataro reach start effect).
Further, the upper part of FIG. 149 is a motion table “Mdat0040” for controlling the image of the movie M1 (the image arranged on the back side), and the lower part of FIG. This is a motion table “Mdat0041” for controlling the image arranged on the side.

Hereinafter, each row of the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 5 registration code” is set as an operation code, and data of “motion index No. (30)” is set as an operand. Thereby, in the above-described motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of scenario layer 1, the display (the display in which the left symbol KTL moves as described above) by the motion table (not shown) specified by the data of the operand is performed. Is performed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “constant wait code” is set as an operation code, and data of “wait time value (60)” is set as an operand. As a result, the above-described constant wait processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time corresponding to 60 frames (2 seconds) is realized. This is to wait for the display of the left symbol KTL moving to the upper corner of the screen to end.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “variable scenario switching code” is set as an operation code, and data of “left symbol scenario 3rd” is set as an operand. Thereby, the change scenario switching process is executed, and the scenario is changed from the first half change to the second half change (reach action) (not shown).
Note that the numerical values such as the wait time value and the motion index in the table shown in FIG. 148 are only specific examples for explanation, and are not necessarily the same as the actual numerical values. The same applies to the tables in the other figures.
Next, the scenario table (right symbol reach start effect) in the middle of FIG. 148 is the same as the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. However, here, since it is a right design, the scenario layer number is 2, and the motion number of the registration code in the first line is 6.

Next, each row of the scenario table (Tiger Tao reach start effect) in the lower part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 4 registration code” is set as an operation code, and data of “motion index No. (40)” is set as an operand. Thereby, in the motion registration process described above in the scenario analysis process of the scenario layer 4, the display (character C7 moves as described above) by the motion table ("Mdat0040" shown in the upper part of FIG. 149) specified by the operand data. Processing for performing display on the back side) is performed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 8 registration code” is set as an operation code, and data of “motion index No. (41)” is set as an operand. Thereby, in the motion registration process described above in the scenario analysis process of the scenario layer 4, the display (character C7 is moved as described above) by the motion table ("Md0041" shown in the lower part of FIG. 149) specified by the operand data. Processing for performing the display on the near side is performed.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “constant wait code” is set as an operation code, and data of “wait time value (30)” is set as an operand. As a result, the above-described constant wait processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time corresponding to 30 frames (1 second) is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to overlap the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR at the center of the screen (the state shown in FIG. 145 (c)).
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of “motion 8 deletion code” is set as an operation code, and “NULL” is set as an operand. As a result, the display in motion 8 is not performed, the display of the character C7 on the near side disappears, and only the display control of the character C7 on the back side is continued, so that the character C7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 145 (c). Is displayed on the far side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), data of “constant wait code” is set as an operation code, and data of “wait time value (30)” is set as an operand. As a result, the above-described constant wait processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time corresponding to 30 frames (1 second) is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to move to the lower left side (the state shown in FIG. 146 (a)).
Next, in the sixth line (// 5), data of “motion 4 deletion code” is set as an operation code, and “NULL” is set as an operand. Thereby, the display in the motion 4 is not performed, and the display of the character C7 on the back side is also turned off.
Next, in the seventh line (// 6), “end code” is set as the operation code, and “NULL” is set as the operand. Thereby, the effect control by this scenario table is completed.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0040”, “Torataro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of “Taro Taro Movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (that is, it is replaced according to the result of the above-mentioned notice lottery), and in the third line (// 2), It is displayed at the display position designated as the movie M1.
In this way, for example, when the character with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered as a basic character in the motion table, and the character is changed as the performance progresses (however, within the same character range) By using a behavior (a function to change image data (character data) of an object (display element)) that changes the basic character to another in the control program, it is possible to support various display modes with one motion table. For example, it becomes data (motion table) that can be used in common at the time of losing and big hit, so that the data capacity can be reduced and the development efficiency is improved.

  In the fourth line (// 3), a command “decode code” and a parameter “object index (0)” are set. This is because the movie M1 (the basic “ This is to execute the above-described object moving image decoding process of decoding “Tora Taro Movie 1” or other movies replaced by behavior) as necessary. It is also possible to display the effect information of the character C7 or the like not by moving images but by still image data. In this case (that is, when the object 0 registered in the first row is a still image), the fourth row Is unnecessary.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0041”, “Torataro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of this “tiger taro movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), this movie M1 (by the basic “tiger taro movie 1” or behavior) A part of the image of another movie) is copied and displayed at the display position designated as the image GM1. However, in this example, the command “effect 1 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect type (1)” are set in the 5th line (/ 4), and the 6th line. Since the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (128)” are set in (// 5), the above-described effect type designation processing and effect parameter designation processing are performed. When executed, the image displayed as the image GM1 is controlled to a translucent state with a transparency (darkness) of about 50% (= 100 × 128/255). However, it is not necessarily required to be in a semi-transparent state, and a mode in which a command or the like on the fifth to sixth lines is not set may be used.
Similarly to the motion table “Mdat0040”, “decode code” and “object index (0)” are set in the fourth line (// 3).

  This motion table “Mdat0041” has the above-mentioned motion lines in order to make the image semi-transparent, and in that the command on the third line is “copy 2 code” instead of movement code. Unlike the table “Mdat0040”, the numerical values of the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the third row and the size (width, height) of the display image are also different from those of the motion table “Mdat0040”. . This is because the display by the motion table “Mdat0040” (the display of the image of the movie M1 in the motion 4 on the back side) is, in this case, “Torataro movie 1” (or another movie replaced by a behavior). Whereas the entire image is displayed on the entire display screen 41a, the display by the motion table “Mdat0041” (the display of the image GM1 in the motion 8 on the near side) is “torataro movie 1” ( Alternatively, only a part of the image of the image (other movie replaced by the behavior) (a part including effect information such as the character C7 or the replaced character C6) is displayed on the display screen 41a at a predetermined position (the character C7 in the motion 4 on the back side). This is because the image is displayed at the same display position as that of the first image. Therefore, the parameters in the third row of the motion table “Mdat0041” are, for example, “X coordinate (823)”, “Y coordinate (200)”, “width (200)”, and “height (200)”. Yes. Since it is “width (200)” and “height (200)”, the image GM1 is a small rectangular image of 200 × 200. On the other hand, in the case of this example, the image of the movie M1 has the entire screen size of 1023 × 767. These numerical values such as the display position are merely numerical examples for explanation, and are not necessarily actual numerical values.

Note that the configuration of the scenario table or the like that realizes the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 to 147 is not limited to the aspect described above. For example, in the example of FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the scenario layer 4 is used to control the character C7 (or another replaced character), but the scenario of scenario layer 1 or 2 in the upper part of FIG. 148 or the middle part of FIG. A line in which a code for registering the motion tables “Mdat0040” and “Mdat0041” is set is added to the table, and only the scenario layer 1 and the scenario layer 2 have symbols (identification information) and characters (production information). ) Can also be controlled. Conversely, in the scenario table of scenario layer 4 in the lower part of FIG. (30) or No. A line for executing the motion registration of (31) can be added, and both the symbol and the character can be controlled only by the scenario layer 4.
In addition, when different motion layers are used, the motion layer in which the character C7 and the like are arranged is not limited to the motion 4 and the motion 8, and any motion can be used as long as it is before or after the motion display layers 5 to 7. It may be a layer. That is, in principle, the image of the character C7 or the like arranged on the back side of the symbol (identification information) may be arranged in any of motions 0 to 4, and the character C7 arranged on the near side of the symbol (identification information). And the like may be arranged in any of the motions 8 to 13.

  Further, in this effect example, in order to place the character C7 and the like (effect information) on the back side or the near side of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the motion layer of the character C7 and the like is made different from the left symbol KTL and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display priority may be set by changing the object index according to the arrangement order of the front and rear. That is, the movie M1 on the back side is arranged in the same motion 5 as the left symbol KTL, and the motion index is set to a value smaller than the left symbol KTL, so that the same as in FIG. 147 (a). A context (display priority) can be realized. Further, the image GM1 obtained by copying the near-side movie M1 is placed in the same motion 6 as the right symbol KTR, and the object index is set to a value larger than the right symbol KTR. The same context as (a) can be realized. However, in this case, as the table configuration, for example, the motion index No. registered in the first row at the top of FIG. In the motion table specified in (30), in addition to the left symbol, the object (such as the character C7) such as the character C7 is registered and controlled, and the motion index registered in the first row in the middle of FIG. No. In the motion table specified in (31), in addition to the right symbol, an object such as the character C7 (which is arranged on the front side) is registered and controlled, and the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 148 is unnecessary.

  Further, in this effect example, as the display information arranged and displayed on the front side or the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, which are identification information, it is added to the identification information as shown in FIG. Although the character C7 “Tiger Taro” or the like which is additional information is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. Production information that is not the above-mentioned additional information may be used, or inanimate (for example, “rose flower”, “flame”, specific figure, etc.) may be displayed as production information instead of a person or creature such as “Tiger Taro” Good.

Next, FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the state (another aspect) of each image and display layer for realizing the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. As shown in FIG. 150, the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 can also be realized by the following configuration.
That is, in the effect display, the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 on the near side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (b) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 150 (a). The image of the movie M1, which is a moving image of the character C7 as described above (production image), is displayed on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). In addition, the images of the same movie M1 are made translucent and arranged in the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the near side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR. The configuration may be such that the display position of the character C7 (the position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) is matched. In other words, in this alternative embodiment, the character C7 is drawn at the same position in the display layer before and after the decorative special design (display layers are motions 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn twice as a whole. On the side, the same image as the back side is made translucent. Since they are the same image, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and since it is semi-transparent, it has the effect of ensuring the visibility of the decorative drawing on the back side.

  When the character C7 is shown on the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (c) in the specific example), as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the image of the movie M1 (effect image). ) Is placed on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the far side of the left symbol KTL and right symbol KTR (identification information), and the display layer (motion on the near side of the left symbol KTL and right symbol KTR) 8: The character C7 is not displayed in the advance notice 5). That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the decorative special design (display layer is motions 5 to 7). This is the same as FIG. 147 (b).

Next, FIG. 151 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. The same scenario table as that in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 151 is exactly the same as the upper part of FIG.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 151 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0041”, “Torataro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of this “tiger taro movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), this movie M1 (by the basic “tiger taro movie 1” or behavior) The entire image of the other movie is displayed on the specified screen. However, the command “Effect 1 Code” and the parameters “Object Index (0)” and “Effect Type (1)” are set in the fifth line (// 4), and “Command” is set in the sixth line (// 5). Since the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (64)” are set, the effect type designation processing and the effect parameter designation processing described above are executed, and the movie M1 is recorded. The image displayed as an image is controlled to a translucent state with a transparency (darkness) of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

  151. The motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 151 is different from the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 149 in that the command in the third line is a movement code. The numerical values of the parameters of the display image size (width, height) are the same as those of the motion table “Mdat0040”. This is because the display by the motion table “Mdat0041” in this case is the same as the display by the motion table “Mdat0040”. This is because it is displayed on the entire 41a. Even when the entire image of the movie M1 is displayed, it is not limited to the mode of displaying on the entire display screen 41a, and there may be a mode of displaying on a limited area of the display screen 41a depending on the contents of the effect.

Next, FIG. 152 is a modification of the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146.
First, in FIG. 152 (a), the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the image of the character C7 etc. displayed on the back side and the image of the character C7 etc. displayed on the near side is different, and the character C7 etc. This is a mode in which two appear and are moved, for example, while the display position is shifted. It should be noted that the display position may be an effect display that only shifts temporarily at a specific timing and does not shift at other than a specific timing and looks like one.
Next, in FIG. 152 (b), the inversion state of the image of the character C7 and the like displayed on the back side is different from the inversion state of the image of the character C7 and the like displayed on the near side (only one is inverted). Two characters C7 and the like appear symmetrically and move, for example, while the inversion states are different. It should be noted that the reversal state may only be temporarily different at a specific timing, and it may be an effect display that looks like a single one at a specific timing.

  According to the effect displays shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the display position shift and the inverted state are different, which causes the player watching the display screen 41a to feel uncomfortable. A highly interesting presentation display is realized. The other effect displays are the same, but the effect displays shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) suggest reliability such as whether or not they are big hits or probability fluctuations. This can be done as a notice effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, by setting the contents of the table used for the lottery so that the player can easily draw the effect display modes shown in FIGS. When it appears, it can be understood that it is easy to hit big by experience, and the reliability can be suggested.

Next, FIG. 153 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (a). The same scenario table as that in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, in the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 153, only “end code” is set as a command in the first line, the second line, and the third line. It is exactly the same as after the eyes.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 153 is exactly the same as the motion table in the lower part of FIG. 151.
As described above, the display control for one frame is ended by the “end code”. Therefore, when the “end code” is set in the first three lines only in the inner motion layer as described above, For the 3 frames, the display of the display layer on the back side is not displayed by the motion table, and the display of the movie M1 on the back side is delayed with a time difference of 3 frames (0.1 second) from the front side. Will do. For this reason, as shown to Fig.152 (a), the display position of the image of the production | presentation information of a near side and a back side will shift | deviate.

Next, FIG. 154 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (b). The same scenario table as that in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 154 is exactly the same as the upper part of FIG.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 154 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0041”, “Torataro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of this “tiger taro movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), this movie M1 (by the basic “tiger taro movie 1” or behavior) The image of the other movie that has been replaced is inverted horizontally (in the left-right direction), and in this case, is displayed on the entire display screen 41a. Also in this example, the command “effect 1 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect type (1)” are set in the fifth line (// 4), and the sixth line ( Since the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (64)” are set in // 5), the image of the movie M1 displayed on the near side has transparency ( The darkness is controlled to a translucent state of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

This motion table “Mdat0041” has the above-mentioned motion lines in order to make the image semi-transparent, and the motion table “Mdat0041” is that the command on the third line is “inverted 2 code” instead of movement code. It is different from the table “Mdat0040”. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the display positions of the images of the effect information on the near side and the far side become symmetrical.
The direction to be reversed may be the vertical direction instead of the horizontal direction (left-right direction), or may be a relationship in which the position is converted to be point-symmetric.

  Next, FIG. 155 to FIG. 158 are areas different from the decorative special figure variable display area on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41) for images of a plurality of effect information different from the decorative special figure design (identification information). Effects in the SD mode including a notification effect for notifying the aspect or result of the variable display game of the special figure (the presence or absence of reach action in this embodiment) by combining the effect information displayed among the plurality of effect information. An example is shown. However, FIG. 155 (a) shows a display example of normal fluctuation for comparison. Note that the 4th symbol is usually always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and a special display start memory hold display (including a special effect display based on a pre-reading notice) is sometimes performed, but this display is complicated. In order to avoid this, the illustration is omitted.

First, FIG. 155 (a) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a display example of normal fluctuation. In this case, the entire display screen 41a is a variable display area for variable display of decorative special symbols (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC). In this case, there are nine types of symbols (identification information) that make up the decoration special figure, from “1” to “9”. As shown in FIG. Attached). For example, “6” has a picture of the face of Torasuke C6 and its name, “7” has a picture of the face of Torataro C7 and its name, and “8” has a character of Tiger Lock C8. The face picture and the character representing the name are added, respectively, and the other “1” to “5” and “9” are also given some effect information (not shown). The added production information is not limited to a character having a tiger motif, but may be a person, an animal, a plant, a fictional creature, or an inanimate object.
In the drawings of the following display examples, description of characters (including leader lines) of characters such as C6 to C8 may be omitted as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 155 (b) and subsequent figures which are the first example of the SD mode effect will be described. Here, “SD” means super deformation. Deformation is generally expressed by deforming and distorting an object. In addition, the SD mode is a production mode in which characters used for additional information of decoration special drawings are actually highly deformed, but in the drawings of the present application, the diagram is simplified and easy to see. For the purpose of securing and the like, the characters are illustrated in the same manner regardless of the presence or absence of deformation. Note that the SD mode production in this example is performed in a normal state that is not a probability variation mode (a special figure jackpot probability is a low probability state), for example, in a probability variation mode (a special chart jackpot probability is a high probability state). Also good.

  When the SD mode effect (first example) is started, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), a decorative special figure variation display area H1 is displayed as a small rectangular area in the upper right corner of the screen 41a. In the variable display area H1, the decorative special figures (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC) are variablely displayed, and the area excluding the variable display area H1 on the screen 41a (hereinafter referred to as the main screen area). Thus, effect display by a plurality of effect information different from the identification information (in this case, the numbers “1” to “9”) is performed. In FIG. 155 (b), display of each image of the sky C10, the ground C11 including the road, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 (sun or moon) is started in the main screen area. Here, the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 all correspond to a kind of effect information different from the identification information, and the effect content forms the background of a character such as “Taro Taro” that appears afterwards. It is also background information.

Of these, the sky C10 is displayed, for example, on the entire innermost screen among the displayed objects, and is a light blue image representing, for example, a blue sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b). The ground C11 is an image of the ground including a road displayed at the lower part of the screen and extending from the front of the screen to the back side, and is displayed so as to appear to move (scroll) to the back side. Further, in this example, the peripheral scenery C12 is an image of, for example, a coniferous forest displayed on both the left and right sides of the center of the screen, and is displayed so as to appear to move (scroll) to the back side. The celestial body C13 is the sun that appears in the sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b), and is displayed so as to gradually move so as to rise from the left side of the screen corresponding to the east side of the sky at this time.
Here, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are images in which the viewer feels a sense of perspective as the road of the ground C11 extends from the front toward the back. Specifically, it is an image in which a vanishing point (infinity point) in perspective is located near the upper center position of the road displayed in the lower center of the screen.

Then, as indicated by the dotted line with an arrow in FIG. 155 (b), the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are displayed as moving toward this vanishing point, so that the place has moved to the front side. The display that looks like is started. The ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 displayed so as to move are background information that realizes the first parameter indicating the passage of time (the first parameter that makes the player who sees the display feel the passage of time). .
In addition, the brightness and color of the sky C10 are displayed so as to change thereafter in accordance with the movement of the celestial body C13 described above, thereby expressing time changes of morning, noon, evening, and night. That is, the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 serve as background information for realizing the second parameter indicating the passage of time (the second parameter that makes the player viewing the display feel the passage of time). As shown in FIG. 155 (b), the sky C10 and the celestial body C13 represent morning.

In the drawings of the following display examples, description of symbols (including leader lines) such as the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 may be omitted as appropriate.
Needless to say, the specific aspects of the production information and background information such as the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 are not limited. For example, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are not limited to the coniferous forest, but may be, for example, a rose garden image, a building district, or the like.
Moreover, the dotted line with an arrow shown in the figure of a display example shows the movement of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12, and when moving, it is also described in the following figures, It is not displayed on the screen 41a (however, this may also be displayed as an effect).

In the SD mode effect (first example), after the display shown in FIG. 155 (b) is made for a short time, the character as the effect information is displayed near the vanishing point as shown in FIG. 155 (c). Appears at positions adjacent to the left and right. In the example of FIG. 155 (c), the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 (a state in which there is a body in addition to the face) appear. Here, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), these characters are displayed so as to appear on the back side (distant) on the road of the ground C11 by being displayed small near the vanishing point, and the back side. Is displayed in a manner (for example, the state of limbs) that looks like it is moving toward the front side (walking or running). That is, the display of the character image such as the tiger taro C7 displayed near the vanishing point is moved (scrolled) to the near side (that is, the variable display) is started. This movement of the character toward the front side is felt relatively more realistically by the display of moving to the back side of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 described above.
It should be noted that the left and right characters do not appear at the same time, but may appear with a time difference, or may be displayed so that there is a difference between the front and rear positions. Further, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), the states of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) are in a state representing daytime. In particular, an image of the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state of rising to a high position in the sky.

Next, when the state of FIG. 155 (c) is passed, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 are displayed gradually larger at the lower part of the screen, and a further forward display is made, as shown in FIG. 156 (a). As shown, after the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 have advanced to the nearest side and stopped for a moment, the display disappears as shown in FIG. 156 (b). In this example, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 are not in a state where a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (direction information)) are in a predetermined combination (a state in which they are aligned). It is not an outbreak notification.
Note that, at the time of FIG. 156 (a), the states of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are still in the state representing the daytime. However, the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a slightly lower position after moving from FIG. 155 (c), and changes similarly thereafter.
Next, after the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the next two characters (in this case, Torasuke C6 and Torataro C7) are on the far side (far). Appears to look like.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the tiger skin C6 and the tiger taro C7 appear to move from the back side toward the near side (walking or running) ( For example, a display that progresses toward the near side is displayed by being gradually displayed large at the bottom of the screen while being displayed in the state of limbs.
Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), when the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 advance to the nearest side and stop for a moment, the presence or absence of reach is notified. In the case of this example, the tiger skin C6 and the tiger taro C7 are in a state where a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (direction information)) are in a predetermined combination (a state in which they are aligned). Become. In this case, “reach!” Which is the dialogue C15 of Torasuke C6 and “daze!” Which is the dialogue C16 of Torataro C7 are displayed, and the player is surely notified of the occurrence of the reach. Although not shown in the figure, if there is no reach, a speech image such as “reach” or “failure” may be displayed. In any case, there may or may not be a speech image, and a mode in which the presence / absence of reach is reported only by a combination of character types may be used.

  According to the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) described above, a plurality of effect information that is not identification information is displayed in a region different from the variation display of the identification information. In order to perform a notification effect that is notified by a combination, effect information with a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character used in additional information of a symbol with a low appearance rate such as “Torataro C7”) also appears in the notification effect. In addition, it is possible to make the production information that is not the additional information of the decoration special figure appear, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced and the dynamic notification production that is easy to understand is possible. In particular, as in this embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), a variable display area H1 for performing variable display of identification information (design of decorative special figure) is arranged at the corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining areas in the screen In a mode in which effect information for notification effect is displayed in a region (main screen region) having a larger area than the variable display region H1, a dynamic notification effect that is easier to understand is possible.

It should be noted that the number of types of characters (effect information) displayed in the main screen area as the notification effect is the number of symbols of the decoration special figure (the number of types of identification information; in this embodiment, 9 from “1” to “9”). The number may be the same as the number of types), more or less. In other words, in the notification effect, all the additional information of the decoration special figure (in the case of the specific example, characters such as “tiger tiger C6”, “tiger tiger C7”, “tiger lock C8”... A mode in which a part of the additional information appears (for example, a mode in which the additional information is grouped and only a specific group of a plurality of groups is appropriately selected, and only characters of the selected group appear. In addition to the additional information, there may be an aspect in which effect information that is not the additional information appears, or an aspect in which only the effect information that is not the additional information appears.
In the effects shown in FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 157 (b), the effect information displayed in the main screen area is changed to the variable display direction (vertical direction) of the decorative special figure in the variable special display variable display area H1. ) Is variably displayed in a different direction (front-rear direction), so that there is an effect that a dynamic and highly interesting production with various movements as a whole screen is realized.

Here, as described above, the variation display in the front-rear direction from the back side to the front side of the character that a plurality of characters (effect information) appear from the back side, move to the front side, and disappear is not limited to twice. It may be performed three or more times. Further, the switching of the character (effect information) type may be performed while the character moves from the back side to the front side. For example, at the time of FIG. 157 (a), or before and after that, the left tiger skin C6 is instantly changed to the tiger taro C7, and at the time of FIG. It may be a configuration that becomes a predetermined combination.
Further, in this display example, as described later, until the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 is switched to a state representing night, the character's front-rear direction variation display is repeated, but the present invention is not limited to this pattern. For example, before the night (or before noon), the character's front-rear fluctuation display ends, and then the game shifts to reach, or the special figure change display game ends without reach (out) There may be a pattern.

  Further, at the time of FIG. 156 (b) and FIG. 156 (c), the states (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are in a state representing the evening. In particular, in FIG. 156 (b), the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state where it has moved to a position lower than the time of FIG. 156 (a). At the time of FIG. Displayed just before moving and sinking to the horizon. At the time of FIG. 157 (a), the states of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display mode, display position, display color, brightness, etc.) are in a state representing night. In particular, an image of the moon is displayed in place of the sun as the celestial body C13, and thereafter, the movement of this month is displayed in a state of progressive progress in FIGS. 157 (b) and 157 (c). In this way, the second parameter indicating the passage of time is realized by the image change of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10. In particular, in this example, the second parameter (the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (background information) is used for the expression. For example, after that, a new appearance from the back side of the character (switching of the type of character (production information) displayed in a variable manner) is not performed, and the front side at that time is changed. If the moving characters are not in a predetermined combination, reach is not set. In other words, it is possible to notify the player that the reach is the last chance, that is, that the reach generation effect period is over, because the images of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are in the state representing the night as background information. It has become.

As described above, by changing the image of the background information, it is possible to suggest or notify a certain period of production or the start, progress, end, etc. of the gaming state.
It should be noted that a notice effect that suggests reliability (reliability of occurrence, reliability of big hit, reliability with high probability after big hit, etc.) can also be realized by such an image change of background information. For example, the probability that the second parameter proceeds to night is high when it is a big hit, and the probability that the variation display in the front-rear direction of the character ends before the second parameter becomes night is high when it is off. If the contents of the table used for the effect lottery (notice lottery) are set, it will be recognized from the player that the background information image is a hot effect at night and is likely to be a big hit.
In addition, the notice effect suggesting the reliability can be realized by the presence / absence of other effect information appearing in the reach occurrence notification effect described above, image change, etc. (other than the image change of the background information). For example, it is possible to suggest the reliability according to the type of combination of characters that have notified the occurrence of reach (for example, a combination of tiger taro C7 is likely to be a big hit).

Next, the display example shown in FIG. 157 (c) is an example of the reach action started after the state shown in FIG. 157 (b), and the movable accessory 700 (the display screen 41a of the display means) is displayed on the lower side of the screen. This is an example of a feature-linked effect that is linked to a movable feature that can be moved in a moving manner. In this case, the movable accessory 700 swings to a position of 40 degrees obliquely, and a rope C17 (an interlocking image that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory) that pulls the movable accessory 700 is newly displayed on the screen 41a. For example, the image of Torasuke C6 disappears, and the image of Torataro C7 holding the end of the rope C17 and pulling the movable accessory 700 in an upright state (interlocking that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory) Image) is also displayed. At the same time, in the decorative display variation display area H1, the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and only the middle symbol fluctuates (in this case, scrolling up and down). Is called. As a result, it is possible to produce reach actions related to the role and display, and to enhance the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the effect linked effect as described above is a notice effect that suggests (notifies) some degree of reliability (reliability to reach, reliability to jackpot, or reliability to be a high probability state (probability change)). As can be done.
Also, in this application, “linked with an accessory” means linked with an action of an accessory, and “an interlocking advance notice” or “linked effect with an accessory” refers to an action of an accessory, display contents, etc. Not only sound output for production but also voice production etc. may be included. In the present application, “interlocking” means changing with some relationship and does not necessarily mean synchronization. “Synchronization” also includes a mode in which the movements are not synchronized but a related movement is performed while being shifted by a predetermined amount, for example, and a movement in the opposite direction is performed. Further, the mode of movement of the movable accessory is not limited to rotation and swinging, but may be linear or curved movement (parallel movement; so-called sliding movement), or movement combining rotation and parallel movement. But you can.

  If the result of the reach is lost, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger taro C7 has failed to cause the movable object 700 to stand up is displayed, and the special figure variable display game ends. . On the other hand, in the case of a big hit as a result of the reach, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger taro C7 has successfully caused the movable accessory 700 to stand up is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, even in the case of a big hit, an image in which the tiger taro C7 has successfully caused the movable accessory 700 to stand up is not displayed, and will be suddenly described later from the state of FIG. 157 (c). You may transfer to the state of FIG.

  Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (a) is an example of a blackout effect that starts after the state shown in FIG. 157 (c). This is because, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), for example, a blackout image C20 in which at least the entire main screen area is painted black, for example, is displayed. Sound effects begin to flow at a low volume and gradually increase in volume. At this time, the entire screen 41a including the decorative special figure variable display area H1 may be displayed with the blackout image C20, except for the 4th pattern. The color of the blackout image C20 is not limited to black, and may be dark blue or gray, for example. According to such a blackout effect, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether or not it was a big hit, more specifically, it may be that it may be a malfunction of the gaming machine, and it is unclear what happened It is possible to realize an unprecedented interest by raising the player's expectation and anxiety about the big hit with a novel production.

In addition, this blackout effect is performed only when it is a big hit (or is performed with a high probability when it is a big hit), and the player is notified that the big hit (or its reliability) is achieved by this effect. It may be suggested to increase the excitement and joy of the player who is a big hit, but if the player loses the game, it will be given a certain probability. As a result, the joy of winning a big hit may be increased.
In FIG. 158 (a), the movable accessory 700 is in a standing state, but at the time of this blackout effect, the movable accessory 700 may be in a state of, for example, an angle of 40 degrees or may be tilted substantially horizontally. It may return to the initial state.

  Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (b) is an example of the jackpot notification effect (the effect at the time of the stop display of the decorative special drawing) that starts after the state of FIG. 157 (a). In this case, for example, the movable accessory 700 is in a standing state, and the image of the rose flower C21 (the linked image and the related image with respect to the accessory) which is the production information related to the decoration portion 701 of the movable accessory 700 is large or small on the screen 41a. A variety of images are displayed, and the effect of congratulating and increasing the joy of winning the jackpot is made. At this time, the rose flower (the actual object that is not an image) of the decoration part 701 of the movable accessory 700 and the screen 41a on which the rose flower C21 that is the image is displayed are displayed so as to look like one painting as a whole. The production effect is enhanced. As the sound, for example, music started to be reproduced in the state of FIG. 157 (a) is continuously output, but for example, music having a dark tone at the time of FIG. 157 (a) is shown in FIG. 157 (b). When it reaches a state, for example, it changes to a bright and cheerful tone, and an effect of congratulating the jackpot is made. Further, at this time, in the variation display area H1 of the decoration special figure, for example, the stop special is displayed with a big hit symbol in which the decoration special figure is “7, 7, 7” (additional information is all tiger taro C7). At this time, the variable display area H1 may be enlarged to display the stop pattern of the decorative special figure in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, FIGS. 159 to 161 are examples of scenario tables for realizing the effect display (including reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b). A detailed description of the motion table used in this display example is omitted.
Of these, the upper part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for the background (in this case, for display control of the above-described sky C10) in the scenario layer 0.
Next, the middle part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for controlling the first stage (1st) of the left symbol KTL (including the above-mentioned ground C11, surrounding scenery C12, celestial body C13, etc.) in the scenario layer 1, and the lower part of FIG. FIG. 160 is a scenario table used for controlling the first half (2nd) of the left symbol KTL and the like in scenario layer 1, and FIG. 160 is a scenario table used for controlling the second half (3rd) of the left symbol KTL and the like in scenario layer 1 It is.

161 is the scenario table used for controlling the first stage (1st) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2, and the second from the top in FIG. 161 is the scenario layer. 2 is the scenario table used for the control of the first half (2nd) of the right symbol KTR, and the third from the top of FIG. 161 is the scenario table used for the control of the latter half (3rd) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2 It is.
161 is the scenario table used for controlling the first stage (1st) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3, and the fifth from the top in FIG. 161 is the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3. 6 is a scenario table used for control of the second half (3rd) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3.
It should be noted that the numerical values such as the wait time value and motion index in the tables shown in FIGS. The same applies to the tables in the other figures.

Hereinafter, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 0; background) in the upper part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 0 registration code” and “motion index No. (81)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (81) (display by the first half of the sky C10 and the first half of the moving picture or still picture) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “constant wait code” and “wait time value (270)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 270 frames (9 seconds). This is to display the first half and the first half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from the morning in FIG. 155 (b) to the night in FIG. 157 (a)).

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 0 registration code” and “motion index No. (82)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (82) (display by the moving image or still image in the latter half of the sky C10) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (375)” are set. This stops the control of the scenario table for a time corresponding to 375 frames (12.5 seconds). This is because the latter half of the sky C10 is displayed (display of the sky C10 from the night of FIG. 157 (b) to the state of FIG. 158 (b)). The display of the sky C10 is hidden behind the blackout image C20 at the time of FIG. 158 (a), but may be displayed as the background of the rose flower C21 at the time of FIG. 158 (b), for example. Good.
Next, the “end code” and “NULL” data are set in the fifth line (// 4). As a result, the control in the scenario layer 0 is not performed, and the display of the empty C10 disappears.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; early part of the left symbol) in the middle of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 4 registration code” and “motion index No. (83)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display (display of the image (moving image or still image) representing the variable display area H1) by the motion table (not shown) of (83) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 3 registration code” and “motion index No. (84)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (84) (display by the first half of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 and the first half of the moving image or still image) is started. In this motion table, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are controlled as different objects, for example.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 2 registration code” and “motion index No. (85)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (85) (display by the moving image or still image of the first half and the first half of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (30)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. Display by the motion table (not shown) of (30) (variable display by a moving image or a still image in the early stage of the left symbol KTL in the variation display area H1) is started.

Next, a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (30)” are set in the fifth line (// 4). As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 30 frames (1 second). This is because the first stage effect by each display or the like started by the control of the scenario table so far is performed for the time.
Next, in the sixth line (// 5), data of “variable scenario switching code” and “left symbol scenario 2nd” are set. As a result, the scenario is switched from the early stage fluctuation to the first half fluctuation according to the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 159, for example.
Each image that has been displayed by controlling the scenario table so far is placed in the motion layer (display layer) corresponding to the motion number, and the context (display priority) is determined (the one with the larger motion number) (This is preferentially displayed as the near side) as already described with reference to FIG. 144 (the same applies to the scenario table described below). For example, since the variable display area H1 is displayed in motion 4 by the first line of the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 159, the empty C10 displayed in motion 0 by the first and third lines of the scenario table in the upper part of FIG. In addition, the second and third lines of the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 159 are preferentially displayed so that they can be seen in front of the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 displayed in motion 3 and motion 2, and these images are displayed. Not hidden by.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; first half of the left symbol) in the lower part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (31)” are set. As a result, the above-described motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table (not shown) of (30), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (31) (variable display by the moving image or still image of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, in the second row (// 1), data of “motion 8 registration code” and “motion index No. (86)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. Display by the motion table (not shown) of (86) (variable display by moving image or still image of the left character in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 9 registration code” and “motion index No. (87)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (87) (variable display by the moving or still image of the right character in the main screen area) is started.
That is, according to the second and third lines, the front and rear variation display in the left and right columns in the main screen area of the character such as the tiger taro C7 described with reference to FIGS. 155 (c) and 156, etc. is started. The

Next, in the fourth line (// 3), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (240)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 240 frames (8 seconds). This is because the first half effect including the variation display of the left symbol in the variation display area H1 and the variation display of the character in the front-rear direction in the main screen area is performed for the corresponding time.
Next, data of “variable scenario switching code” and “left symbol scenario 3rd” are set in the fifth line (// 4). As a result, when there is a reach, the scenario is switched from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation (reach action) according to the scenario table of FIG. 160, for example.

Next, each row in the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the second half of the left symbol) in FIG. 160 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 8 registration code” and “motion index No. (88)” are set. As a result, the above-described motion index No. In place of the display by the motion table of (86), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (88) (stop display by the moving image or still image of the left character in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 9 registration code” and “motion index No. (89)” are set. As a result, the above-described motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (87), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (89) (stop display by the moving or still image of the right character in the main screen area) is started.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 3 registration code” and “motion index No. (90)” are set. As a result, the above-described motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (84), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (90) (display by the moving image or the still image of the latter half of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of “motion 2 registration code” and “motion index No. (91)” are set. As a result, the above-described motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (85), the motion index No. Display by the motion table (not shown) of (91) (display by the second half of the moving object or still image of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (30)” are set in the fifth line (// 4). As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 30 frames (1 second).
Here, according to the first to fifth lines, the display for informing the occurrence of the reach described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed for a specified time (1 second). At this time, the images of the above-described lines C15 and C16 are, for example, the motion index No. (88) and motion index no. In the motion table of (89), for example, it is controlled and displayed as an object separate from the character such as the tiger taro C7.

Next, “stop symbol set code (left symbol)” and “NULL” are set in the sixth line (// 5). Thereby, the above-mentioned symbol stop process is executed for the left symbol, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the decorative special symbol is set.
Next, in the seventh line (// 6), data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (32)” are set. As a result, the above-described motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table (not shown) of (31), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (32) (stop display by moving picture or still picture of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, “Motion 8 deletion code” and “NULL” are set in the eighth line (// 7). As a result, the motion deletion process described above is performed, the display in motion 8 is not performed, and the display of the left character (for example, “Torakesuke C6”) in the main screen area disappears.
Next, in the ninth line (// 8), “motion 9 deletion code” and “NULL” are set. As a result, the motion deletion process described above is performed, the display in motion 9 is no longer performed, and the display of the right character (for example, “Torataro C7”) in the main screen area disappears.

Next, in the 10th line (// 9), “object position code” and “object position No. (4)” are set. “Accessory position code” is an operation code for instructing a setting change (that is, movement (state change) of the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700) of the state of the movable accessory 700 (initial state or standing state). For example, “object position No. (9)” instructs the standing state of the movable accessory 700, and “object position No. (4)” indicates an operand that instructs the movable accessory 700 to be at an angle of 40 degrees. It is data of. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “object position code” in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable accessory 700 are slanted as shown in FIG. A control process for setting an angle of 40 degrees is executed.
In addition, as other data of the operand corresponding to the “object position code”, there is “object position No. (0)” for instructing the initial state of the movable accessory 700, and the decoration unit 701 is in the initial state. “Function position No. (1)” for instructing the state displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 10 degrees rather than the initial state, the state in which the decoration portion 701 is displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 20 degrees from the initial state is commanded “Composition item position No. (2)”, “Composition item position No. (3)” commanding a state in which the decorative portion 701 is displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 30 degrees from the initial state, etc. Various devices that command the state of each angle between the initial state and the standing state may be set.

Next, in the 11th line (// 10), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (15)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 15 frames (0.5 seconds). This is to wait for the movable object 700 to be inclined 45 degrees from the initial state.
Next, in the 12th line (// 11), data of “motion 8 registration code” and “motion index No. (92)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (92) (display of the linked image in the main screen area as a moving image or a still image) is started. The interlocking image is, for example, the image of the rope C17 described above or the tiger taro C7 that pulls the rope C17.
Next, in the 13th line (// 12), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (45)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 45 frames (1.5 seconds).
In the scenario table, the code between the wait time value and the wait time value (the operation code of the line between the line where the constant wait code etc. is set and the line where the constant wait code etc. is set next) Are all executed at the same time. For example, in the case of FIG. 160, the constant weight code or the like from the first line (// 0) to the fourth line (// 3) or the sixth line (// 5) to the tenth line (// 9). Since there are no rows set, the first row (// 0) to the fourth row (// 3), and the sixth row (// 5) to the tenth row (// 9) are all at the same time. To be executed.

According to the sixth to thirteenth lines described above, the reach action effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above (the effect in which the effect display of the movable accessory 700 and the main screen area is linked, and the left in the variable display area H1). Reach action production in which the symbol and right symbol stop and the middle symbol fluctuates) is performed for a total of 2 seconds.
Then, in the case of detachment with reach, for example, after that, a stop symbol display (not shown) of the detachment symbol is performed and control is performed to return the movable accessory 700 to the initial state, but the scenario table of FIG. Is an example of a table that is selected in the case of a big hit, and thereafter, control for the big hit is performed.

That is, in the next 14th line (// 13), the “object position code” and the “object position number (9)” are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “object position code” in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 105), the decoration portion 701 and the like of the movable object 700 stand up as shown in FIG. 158 (a). A control process for setting the state is executed.
Next, in the 15th line (// 14), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (45)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 45 frames (1.5 seconds).
According to the 14th line to the 15th line described above, through the reach action production shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above, the operation of the movable accessory 700 standing up and the tiger taro C7 ( Alternatively, an image (not shown) of the movable character 700 being pulled by the rope C17 by another character replaced by this and the behavior) is displayed. Note that the image in which this character pulls the movable accessory 700 with the rope C17 is the motion index No. registered in the 12th row. It is controlled by the motion table (92).

Next, in the 16th line (// 15), “motion 8 deletion code” and “NULL” are set. As a result, the motion deletion process described above is performed and the display in motion 8 is not performed, and the display of characters such as the rope C17 in the main screen area and the tiger taro C7 that pulls it disappears.
Next, in the 17th line (// 16), “motion 3 deletion code” and “NULL” are set. As a result, the motion deletion process described above is performed, the display in motion 3 is not performed, and the display of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 disappears.
Next, in the 18th line (// 17), data of “motion 2 registration code” and “motion index No. (93)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (91), the motion index No. Display (93) of the motion table (not shown) (display of the blackout image C20 as a moving image or a still image) is started. Note that the new registration of motion 18 in the 18th row causes the display of the celestial body C13 (month) in the same motion 2 (that is, the display by the motion table of the motion index No. (91)) to disappear.

Next, in the 19th line (// 18), data of “audio setting code” and “sound No. (15)” are set. Thus, in the process corresponding to the “voice setting code” in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted in the wavy line in FIG. 105), a process for outputting the voice specified by the operand data is performed. Sound No. The operand data (15) is data for designating music or sound effects in the blackout effect described above.
Next, in the 20th line (// 19), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (150)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 150 frames (5 seconds).
According to the 16th to 20th lines described above, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 158 (a) is performed.

Next, in the 21st line (// 20), data of “motion 3 registration code” and “motion index No. (94)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (94) (display by the moving image or still image of the rose flower C21 in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the 22nd line (// 21), “constant wait code” and “wait time value (90)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for the time corresponding to 90 frames (3 seconds).

According to the 21st to 22nd lines described above, the jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 158 (b) is performed for 3 seconds.
Note that a line in which “motion 2 deletion code” is set is inserted immediately before the 21st line, and the motion index No. performed in motion 2 is changed. The display by the motion table (93) (display of the blackout image C20) may be deleted. However, the display of the rose flower C21 in the motion 3 starting from the 21st line (display by the motion table of the motion index No. (94)) is all the images (in the main screen area shown in FIG. 158 (b)). In the case of displaying a plurality of roses and their backgrounds, the blackout image C20 is hidden by the display in the motion 3 and cannot be seen. Further, in the case of this table example, the sound output set in the 19th line is continued also during the jackpot notification effect, and this sound output enhances the effect of congratulating the jackpot.

Next, since the “end code” is set in the last 24th line (// 23), the scenario layer 1 is no longer controlled.
The production control by the scenario table is terminated for the target scenario layer by the “end code” on the 24th line (// 23). However, after the new scenario table is set, Needless to say, the production control is performed again.

Next, the first scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; right design early stage) will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration for the change display of the early stage of the right symbol KTR in the change display area H1 is performed, and in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and the scenario is switched in the third line. .
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol (control for the variable display of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) by the scenario table shown in the middle of FIG. 159 for the right symbol.

Next, the second scenario table (scenario layer 2; first half of the right symbol) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration for the first half of the change of the right symbol KTR in the fluctuation display area H1 is registered, and in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and the scenario is switched in the third line. .
This is the same control as the left symbol control (control for the first half variation display of the left symbol KTL in the variation display region H1) by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 for the right symbol.

Next, the third scenario table from the top in FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; the latter half of the right symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the wait time value for character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set, and in the second line, the stop pattern of the right pattern KTR is set, and the third line Then, the stop display of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1 is started, the wait time value for the stop display is set in the fourth line, and the control of the scenario layer 2 is ended in the fifth line.
This is the same control as the left symbol control (control for the second half display of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) according to the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 for the right symbol.
According to the first to third scenario tables from the top of FIG. 161 described above, the right side of the decoration special drawing in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above. Symbol display is realized.

Next, the fourth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle symbol early stage) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration for the variable display of the early stage of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 is performed, the wait time value is set in the second line, and the scenario is switched in the third line. .
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol (control for displaying the variation of the left symbol KTL in the variation display region H1) in the middle of FIG. 159 for the middle symbol.

Next, the fifth scenario table (scenario layer 3; first half of middle symbol) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration for the first half of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 is registered, and in the second line, a wait time value is set for that, and the scenario is switched in the third line. .
This is the same control as the left symbol control (control for the first half variation display of the left symbol KTL in the variation display region H1) by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 for the middle symbol.

Next, the sixth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle symbol second half) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, the wait time value for character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set, and in the second line, the latter half of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 is changed. Registration for display (fluctuation display of medium symbol KTC in the fluctuation display area H1 during the reach action shown in FIG. 157 (c) to 158 (a)) is performed, and in the third line, from FIG. 157 (c) The wait time value for the reach action shown in FIG. 158 (a) is set, the stop symbol of the medium symbol KTC is set in the fourth line, and the stop display of the intermediate symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 is set in the fifth line. , The wait time value for the stop display is set in the sixth line, and the control of the scenario layer 3 is finished in the seventh line.
In this case, control corresponding to the left symbol control (control for the second half display of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) according to the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 is performed for the middle symbol. However, since the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the reach action (scrolling at a low speed), the second and third rows are provided, and this is different from the left symbol and the right symbol.
According to the fourth to sixth scenario tables from the top of FIG. 161 described above, in the decorative special drawing in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above. Symbol display is realized.

  Next, FIGS. 162 and 163 are modified examples of a series of effects (examples of effects in the SD mode) from FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. In this modified example, a character such as a tiger taro C7 appearing in the main screen area appears in the main screen area and at the same time is not displayed as additional information on the decoration special drawing in the variable display area H1. When a character such as a tiger taro C7 disappears from the main screen area, the display as the additional information in the variable display area H1 is resumed. For example, when the tiger taro C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the main screen area as shown in FIGS. 162A and 162B, the tiger taro C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the variable display area H1. Is then controlled so that when the tiger lock C8 disappears from the main screen area as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the display of the tiger lock C8 in the variable display area H1 is resumed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c), 163 (a), and 163 (b), when the tiger taro C7 and the tiger suke C6 are displayed in the main screen area, the tiger in the variable display area H1 is displayed. The display of taro C7 and tiger skin C6 is controlled so as not to be performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (c), when tiger skin C6 disappears from the main screen area, the display of tiger skin C6 in the variable display area H1 resumes. To be controlled.

In the progression of the production, FIGS. 162 (a), 162 (b), and 162 (c) are the same as FIGS. 155 (c), 156 (a), and 156 (c), respectively. It is a display example at the same timing. Similarly, FIG. 163 (a), FIG. 163 (b), and FIG. 163 (c) are display examples at the same timing as FIG. 157 (a), FIG. 157 (b), and FIG. 157 (c), respectively. is there.
According to this modified example, when a character such as tiger taro C7 appears (starts display) in the main screen area, as shown by a dotted line with an arrow in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (c), for example, When viewed, the character appears to jump out of the variable display area H1. Further, when a character such as the tiger taro C7 disappears from the main screen area (display end or hidden by another image), the character appears to return to the variable display area H1 when viewed from the player. As a result, a dynamic and innovative production is realized.

In addition, the dotted line with an arrow which shows that the tiger taro C7 grade | etc., In FIG. 162 (a) and FIG. 162 (c) jumps out from the fluctuation | variation display area H1 is for description, and does not need to be actually displayed. However, it may be configured to display an image that expresses the character entry / exit from the variable display area H1 to the main screen area in an easily understandable manner.
Further, the modified example can be controlled by a scenario table or a motion table as in the specific examples described above, but the description of specific examples of these tables will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 164 shows another modification of the series of effects (examples of effects in the SD mode) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above. This modified example is characterized by a mode of displaying the character in the front-rear direction in the main screen area and a mode of combining the characters that notify the occurrence of reach. That is, in the display example, as shown in FIG. 155 (c) and FIG. 156 (a), characters arranged in a plurality of columns (in this case, two columns on the left and right) simultaneously advance toward the front side. It is not limited to. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), only the left character is stopped and displayed on the near side, and only the right character is switched one after another and appears on the far side and proceeds to the near side. This is a mode in which the character variation display is performed by (for example, running). It should be noted that the variation display of the character in the main screen area may also be changed to such a manner in the middle so that the variation display of the decoration special figure shifts to reach action (second half variation) from the middle.

In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (b) and FIG. 164 (c), when there is a reach, the target character that will become a predetermined combination sometime (in this case, for example, the tiger lock C8) The same character (such as the tiger lock C8) appears on the right side, proceeds to the near side, stops, and this causes a reach occurrence notification. In this manner, the combination of characters in the presence of reach (that is, the occurrence of reach notification) is the same type of character (spotted eyes) in the same manner as the combination of symbols of the decorative special figure that is a big hit. There may be.
In any case, according to the production example and the present modification, the variation display direction of the decoration special figure is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation display of the decoration special figure performed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the fluctuation display region H1. Since a variable display of a character in a direction (front-rear direction) that is different from the conventional one (a variable display game that determines whether or not reach is seen from the player) is performed in the main screen area, a dynamic and innovative effect is realized.

Next, FIG. 165 is another modification of the series of effects (examples of effects in the SD mode) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above.
First, FIG. 165 (a) and FIG. 165 (b) are other examples of the reach occurrence notification effect shown in FIG. 157 (b). It is characterized in that the postures of limbs and the like are not the same but different. In this way, a configuration that suggests (notifies), for example, the reliability of a big hit after a reach action (or the reliability that becomes a high probability state (probability change)) depending on the presence / absence of differences in the poses of the aligned characters and the content of the differences It is good. Note that FIG. 165 (a) shows a case where the predetermined combination used for reaching out notification is different, and FIG. 165 (b) shows a case where the predetermined combination used for reaching out notification is the same character.

Next, FIG. 165 (c) is an example of a special effect (a combination of effects with the movable article on the upper side) performed in the character front-rear direction display performed in the main screen area described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (c), for example, the special effect is a display mode in which the left character (for example, tiger lock C8) that has advanced to the near side has a predetermined item (for example, rose flower; luminous effect information). (The light emission interlocking image) is displayed, and simultaneously with the display of the light emission interlocking image, the left half of the upper movable accessory 801 emits light (for example, flashes rapidly). Although not shown in the figure, for example, when an image (light emission interlocking image) as a display mode in which the right character that has advanced to the near side has a predetermined item (light emission effect information) is displayed, The effect may be that the right half of the movable accessory 801 emits light. Alternatively, although not shown, for example, when an image (light emission interlocking image) as a display mode in which both the left and right characters that have advanced to the near side have a predetermined item (light emission effect information) is displayed, this display At the same time, the entire upper movable accessory 801 may emit light. Such special effects may be appropriately performed. This special effect can also be performed as a notice effect that suggests (notifies) some degree of reliability (reliability for reach, reliability for big hits, or reliability for high probability state (probability)). it can.
In addition, the specific example of the said FIG. 165 (c) is the display mode in the state in which presentation information (for example, characters, such as tiger lock C8) different from identification information (design of a decoration special figure) has a predetermined item, This is an example in which the mode (light emission state) of the accessory changes in conjunction with the display of the display mode, but is not limited to such a specific example. For example, when a display mode such as the display color, display size, display position, pose (such as posture of limbs) of the character itself such as the tiger lock C8 becomes a specific display mode, the display of the specific display mode is interlocked. Thus, a configuration in which the mode of an accessory (such as a light emission state) changes may be used. In addition, the change in the mode of the accessory that changes in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information is not limited to only the change in the light emission state of the role, as in the specific example shown in FIG. 163 (c) described above. It is good also as a structure from which the operation state of an accessory, an operation position, etc. change.

Next, inventive concepts that can be extracted or developed from the embodiments described above will be described below.
(Invention concept (1))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like and FIGS. 101, 145 to 149 and the like, the control means (effect control device 300) that controls the display means (display device 41) to produce the variable display game is provided. The image of the identification information (for example, a number constituting the design of the decorative special figure) and the image of the effect information (for example, a specific character (for example, the aforementioned tiger taro C7) having a motif such as an animal) overlap (the display position is When performing the effect display with the matching state), when displaying the effect information image on the back side in the overlapped portion, the effect image (for example, movie) displayed on the entire screen including the effect information image, for example When the image of M1) is placed on the back side of the image of identification information (for example, the image of the right pattern KTR, etc.) and the effect information image is displayed on the near side in the overlapped part, The effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, and an image (for example, the image GM1) obtained by partially copying the portion including the image of the effect information in the effect image is displayed. It has the function to arrange on the near side.
Note that “place on the back” means to place and display on a different display layer on the back side, and “place on the near side” means to place and display on a different display layer on the near side. It is. Here, the display layer is a layer (determining, for example, a motion layer in this embodiment) that determines the context (display priority) of whether to display as the near side or the other side on the screen. Means.

  This makes it possible to easily create a dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the near side with respect to the image of the identification information, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, the control of the effect is such that the effect image including the effect information image remains arranged on the back side of the identification information image even if the front and back relationship between the effect information image and the identification information image is different. An image obtained by partially copying a part (or a plurality of parts) including the effect information image in the effect image is disposed on the front side of the identification information image only when the information image is displayed on the near side. This can be realized with simple control. Further, since only the part including the image of the specific effect information in the effect image to be arranged on the back side is arranged on the near side, at least other than the area overlapping with the part including the image of the specific effect information Can be surely seen, and there is also an advantage that the image of the identification information (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is not unnecessarily disturbed by the image on the near side.

The inventive concept (1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
In the display area (screen) of the display means, when executing the effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information overlap at least partially,
When displaying the image of the effect information as the back side in the overlapped part, arrange the effect image including the image of the effect information on the back side of the image of the identification information,
In the case where the effect information image is displayed on the near side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the identification information image and the effect information image in the effect image is included. A gaming machine having a function of arranging an image obtained by partially copying (a plurality of copies) on the front side of the image of the identification information.
Here, the effect image may be a still image or a moving image (for example, an image of a predetermined frame of the moving image).
Further, the effect image means an image in a case where the effect image data (still image or moving image data) stored in a predetermined storage means (image ROM 322 in this embodiment) is entirely drawn. However, it is not necessarily limited to what is displayed on the entire screen.

  In this embodiment, the control means (the effect control device 300) translucently transposes an image (an image obtained by copying a portion including the effect information image in the effect image) arranged on the front side of the identification information image. Can be displayed. As a specific example, for example, the effect code (effect 1 code, effect 2 code) of the motion table shown on the lower side of FIG. Thereby, the advantage that the visibility of the image of the identification information is ensured to some extent even in the portion where the image arranged on the near side and the image of the identification information overlap, and the effect image arranged on the near side and the image arranged on the near side In addition, the image of the identification information and the like overlap with each other, and the color and density of the image such as the effect information and the identification information are changed, so that an effect of increasing interest can be obtained.

The above configuration is expressed as follows as a subordinate concept (1-2) of the inventive concept (1).
The control means includes
A gaming machine having a function of arranging an image obtained by copying a portion including the image of the effect information in the effect image as a semi-transparent shape on the front side of the image of the identification information.

The background of the inventive concept (1) and the like will be described below.
Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine having a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information and capable of generating a state advantageous to a player according to the result of the variable display game. Are known.
In this type of gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192622, various effects including a notice suggesting the result of the variable display game and the like are provided as effects at the time of the variable display game. This is performed by the display device or the like.
By the way, in this kind of gaming machine, although the production is diversified, for example, a more dynamic and interesting production is required.
The inventive concept (1) and the like of the present application have been made to solve the above-described problems, and are intended to provide a gaming machine with high gaming interests, and achieve this purpose.

(Invention concept (2))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like, FIG. 145, FIG. 146, FIG. 148, FIG. 150, FIG. 151 and the like, the control for controlling the display means (display device 41) to produce the variable display game. Means (production control device 300) is an image of identification information (for example, a number constituting the design of a decorative special figure) and production information (for example, a specific character (for example, the aforementioned tiger taro C7) having an animal motif) When performing the effect display with the state of overlapping with each other, when the image of the effect information is displayed on the back side in the overlapped portion, the effect image (for example, the image of the movie M1) including the effect information image is identified. In the case where the information image is arranged on the back side of the information image and the effect information image is displayed on the near side, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the identification information image. It has the ability to place the serial presentation image on the front side of the image identification information as the semi-transparent.

  This makes it possible to easily create a dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the near side with respect to the image of the identification information, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, the control of the effect is such that the effect image including the effect information image remains arranged on the back side of the identification information image even if the front and back relationship between the effect information image and the identification information image is different. Only when the information image is displayed on the front side, the effect image can be realized by simple control such that the effect image is arranged in a translucent state on the front side of the identification information image. In particular, the image cutting work (partial copying work) as in the concept (1) does not occur, so that the processing load on the control means can be reduced. In addition, since the rendering image is made translucent because it is arranged on the front side, the visibility of the identification information image (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is also ensured. it can. In addition, the effect image arranged on the near side, the effect image arranged on the back side, the image of identification information, etc. are overlapped, and the color of the effect image (including the image of effect information) and the image of the identification information, etc. The effect of increasing interest by changing the concentration is obtained.

The inventive concept (2) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
In the display area (screen) of the display means, when executing the effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information overlap at least partially,
When displaying the image of the effect information as the back side in the overlapped part, arrange the effect image including the image of the effect information on the back side of the image of the identification information,
In the case where the effect information image is displayed on the near side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the identification information image, and the effect image is made translucent and the identification information A gaming machine having a function of being arranged on the front side of an image.

(Invention concept (3))
In this embodiment, as described in step D444, FIG. 102, FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b), FIGS. 159 to 161, etc., identification information (for example, “1” to Identification information on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41) is displayed for a plurality of pieces of effect information (for example, a character such as “Tarotaro” set for each piece of identification information and different for each piece of identification information). A display mode or result of a special figure variable display game (in the present embodiment, whether or not there is a reach action) depending on the combination of the effect information displayed in the region (the main screen region) different from the variable display of ) Can be performed (for example, an effect for reporting the occurrence of reach). As a result, for example, an effect with a low appearance rate as a stop symbol is produced as compared with a case where a notification effect is performed by using identification information and additional information added to the identification information (for example, a character added for each number of a decoration special figure). Information and the like can be made to appear in the notification effect, and an easy-to-understand and dynamic effect can be realized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (3) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
A plurality of pieces of effect information that are not the identification information are displayed in a region (a plurality of locations) different from the identification information display region in which the variation display of the identification information is performed in the display region (screen) of the display means. A game machine capable of executing a notification effect that notifies or suggests (notices) the mode or result of the variable display game by a combination of the displayed effect information.
The production information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be this additional information.
The “identification information display area” corresponds to the above-described variable display area H1, and the “area different from the identification information display area” corresponds to the above-described main screen area.

The background of the inventive concept (3) will be described below.
Conventionally, as a notification effect for notifying the occurrence of reach, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-136516 is known. This is to execute the reach occurrence notification effect in a notification mode according to the type of the attached character when the reach state occurs during the execution of variable display of the effect symbols (variation display of the identification information). Specifically, as described in, for example, FIG. 102 and paragraph 0453 of the publication, the types of attached characters (additional information) added to the stop symbols (for example, “1” and “2”) in the reach state If the character is a male character, the message “Double reach!” Is displayed. If the character is a female character, the message “Double reach!” Is displayed.

  As described above, in the conventional notification effect, the character for the notification effect (effect information) is arranged around the identification information (for example, “1”, “2”, etc.) constituting the decoration special drawing and integrated with the identification information. Since it is displayed only as an image of additional information that is variably displayed (or stopped), there are the following problems. That is, for example, there is a considerable difference in the appearance rate between the types of symbols (that is, the types of identification information) displayed as stop symbols in the reach state. There is a problem that the player rarely sees the notification effect of the attached character added to the character. In addition, there is a problem that characters (effect information) other than the additional information cannot be seen. Moreover, since the image of the character related to the notification effect is only displayed integrally with the identification information as additional information, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the content of the notification effect. For example, in the specific example of the above publication, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the display of “double reach!” Corresponds to a female character, and the type of character to which the display of the notification effect corresponds. However, there was a problem that it was difficult for the player to understand the contents of the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of pieces of effect information that is not identification information is displayed in a region different from the variation display of the identification information, and a notification effect that is notified or suggested (noticed) by a combination of the displayed effect information is performed. Therefore, performance information with a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character such as “tiger taro C7” used as additional information of the probability variation symbol “7” with a low appearance rate) can also appear in the notification effect. Further, it is possible to make the effect information that is not the additional information of the decoration special figure appear, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced and the dynamic notification effect that is easy to understand can be realized. In particular, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), the variable display area H1 for performing the variable display of the identification information is arranged at the corner of the screen 41a, and is the remaining area in the screen that is larger than the variable display area H1. If the effect information for the notification effect is displayed in a large area (main screen region), a dynamic notification effect that is easier to understand is possible.
The subordinate concept (3-2) of the inventive concept (3) is expressed as follows.
The control means includes
In the notification effect, an identification information display area for performing variable display of the identification information is arranged at a corner of the display area (screen), and the remaining area in the display area is larger than the identification information display area. A game machine, wherein the effect information is displayed in a large area.

  In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 157 (c) and the like, a movable accessory (for example, movable accessory 700) that can move with respect to the display screen 41a of the display device 41 is provided. The effect control device 300, which is the control means, changes the image of the effect information that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory (for example, the image of the rope C17 described above and the image of the rope C17 pulling the rope C17; (Linked image) is displayed on the display screen 41a. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect related to an accessory and display, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

The above configuration is expressed as follows as a subordinate concept (3-3) of the inventive concept (3).
A movable accessory capable of moving relative to a display area (screen) of the display means;
The gaming machine has a function of displaying an image of the effect information (the linked image) that changes in conjunction with the operation of the movable accessory in a display area of the display unit.

  The movable accessory 700 according to the present embodiment is displayed on the display screen 41a so that at least the decoration portion 701 (the main portion that produces the effect) covers a part of the display screen 41a when viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player). An in-screen arrangement state (corresponding to the standing state or a state where the user stands up obliquely) located in front of the screen, and an out-of-screen arrangement in which the whole or substantially the whole including the decoration portion 701 does not cover the front surface of the display screen 41a It is possible to move to a state (corresponding to the initial state). Thus, when performing an effect that operates in conjunction with the interlocking image, the main part of the accessory 700 is surely positioned within the player's field of view by placing the accessory 700 in the above-described arrangement state in the screen. Thus, the player can surely show the player the effect linked with the movable accessory. Further, in the case where the effect of interlocking the movable accessory and the interlocking image is not performed, the view of the player who is paying attention to the display screen 41a is not obstructed if the accessory 700 is placed in the off-screen arrangement state. Thus, it is possible to show the player a display effect using the entire display screen 41a.

The above configuration is expressed as follows as a subordinate concept (3-4) of the inventive concept (3).
The movable accessory has an in-screen arrangement state that is located in front of the display area so that at least a main part that produces an effect covers a part of the display area when viewed from the front, and the whole or substantially includes the main part. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of moving to an off-screen arrangement state where the whole is located in a place not covering the front surface of the display area.

  In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 165 (c) and the like, the effect control device 300, which is provided with an accessory (for example, the upper accessory 801) capable of emitting light separately from the display device 41, is a control means. A light emission interlocking image (an image of a character such as a tiger taro having a predetermined item) including predetermined light emission effect information (for example, a rose flower which is a predetermined item) is displayed in the main screen area as the image of the effect information. , And has a function of causing the accessory to emit light in conjunction with the display of the emission interlocking image. Thereby, the effect by light emission of an accessory is performed in conjunction with the display of the effect information by the display means, and the entertainment of the game can be further enhanced.

The above configuration is expressed as follows as a subordinate concept (3-5) of the inventive concept (3).
Provided with an accessory capable of emitting light separately from the display means,
The control means has a function of displaying a light emission interlocking image including predetermined light emission effect information as an image of the effect information, and having the function of causing the accessory to emit light in conjunction with the display of the light emission interlocking image. Machine.

(Invention concept (4))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 146 (b), 146 (c), etc., the identification information (for example, the numbers “1” to “9”) constituting the decoration special drawing and the identification information Corresponding to the positional relationship of the display position with non-production information (for example, a character such as “tiger taro”), it is possible to temporarily change the production information and perform reliability suggestion (notice). For this reason, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (4) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
In the variable display game, effect information that is not the identification information is displayed in addition to the identification information in the display area (screen) of the display means, and an effect display in which the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information changes. Is feasible and
In the effect display, when a display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, a change in a display state or a display mode of an image displayed in the display area including at least the effect information is generated. Is possible,
A gaming machine having a configuration capable of suggesting a mode of the variable display game that proceeds subsequently or a result of the variable display game to be determined thereafter, depending on the presence or absence or mode of the change in the effect display.
Here, the effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be this additional information.
In addition, the “suggestable configuration” means a configuration capable of so-called advance notice. For example, the probability of occurrence of each of the various aspects of the variable display game that may be selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter ( (Specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the type of the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is changed before the lottery. It is the structure set as different according to the presence or absence or aspect of this. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the variation display game mode having a high possibility of proceeding, for example, from the presence / absence or mode of the change, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The same applies to the “suggestable configuration” for the result of the variable display game to be confirmed thereafter. For example, a table (for example, the notice distribution table) used for the lottery to determine the presence or the mode of the change has already been established. A configuration in which different tables are set according to the determined result of the variable display game (for example, a table having a relatively high probability that the change is selected in the case of a big hit is used, and is out of place) In such a case, a table having a relatively high probability that the no change is selected is used, and thereby, for example, a configuration that can indicate to the player that there is a high possibility of a big hit by executing the change with the effect. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined later, based on the presence / absence or mode of the change, to increase the interest of the game.

The change may be, for example, a change in the character mode (display color, display size, etc.) as the effect information, or a change in character type as the effect information. And the change which the character as said production | generation information disappears may be sufficient, and the whole image including the character as said production | generation information may be in a black painting state (black-out state). The change occurs temporarily when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information is a predetermined positional relationship, and when the predetermined positional relationship is lost, the change is temporary. However, for example, it may occur when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, and once changed, the changed state may be maintained thereafter.
Further, the predetermined positional relationship may be a state where the display position is close within a predetermined distance, a state where the display position is coincident at least in part (a state where the display overlaps at least partly), or display. The position range may be such that one of the positions is completely within the other image.

(Invention concept (5))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154 and the like, it is possible to provide a time difference to the same movie to be superimposed or to make it a symmetric image, and to give a sense of incongruity and suggest reliability. For this reason, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (5) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
During the variable display game, in the display area (screen) of the display means, it is possible to execute an effect display by a moving image in which the display position of the effect information that is not the identification information changes,
In the effect display, the same moving image can be displayed in a plurality of overlappingly before and after the screen with a difference in reproduction timing or inversion state,
According to the presence / absence or mode of the reproduction timing or inversion state in the effect display, it is possible to suggest the mode of the variation display game that proceeds thereafter or the result of the variation display game to be confirmed thereafter. A gaming machine.
The production information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be this additional information.
In addition, the “suggestable configuration” means a configuration capable of so-called advance notice. For example, the probability of occurrence of each of the various aspects of the variable display game that may be selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter ( (Specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the setting of the type of the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is the difference before the lottery. It is the structure set as different according to the presence or absence or aspect of this. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the variation display game mode having a high possibility of proceeding, for example, from the presence / absence or mode of the difference. The same applies to the “possible configuration” for the result of the variable display game to be determined thereafter. For example, a table (for example, the notice distribution table) used for the lottery for determining the presence or absence of the difference or the aspect is already present. Configuration that is set in a table with different contents according to the determined result of the variable display game (for example, a table with a relatively high probability that the difference is selected in the case of a big hit is used, and is out of place In such a case, a table having a relatively high probability that the difference is not selected is used, and thereby, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the player will have a big hit by performing the difference. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined later, for example, based on the presence / absence or mode of the difference.

(Invention concept (6))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 162, 163, etc., additional information that is added to the identification information of the decorative special figure and displayed in a variable manner (added to a number or the like that is a symbol of the decorative special figure). Effect display that jumps out from the identification information display area (variable display area H1) where the identification information is displayed in a variable manner to the main screen area can be executed. (The display of the additional information integrated with the identification information disappears and disappears), and the identification information in which the additional information does not jump out is displayed in a variable state with the additional information added. And it is the structure which not only SD mode but the additional information which jumped out produces some effects. For this reason, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, when the additional information that has popped out is absent (not displayed) in the identification information display area, it is clear that the specific additional information has jumped out and the type of additional information that has popped out, which is more interesting. An easy-to-understand production can be realized.

The inventive concept (6) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
During the variable display game, the variable display of the identification information is performed in the identification information display area set as a part of the display area (screen) of the display means, and the variable display is added to the identification information and integrally displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that an effect display in which the added additional information is moved from the identification information display area to the outside of the identification information display area can be executed.

The subordinate concept (6-2) of the inventive concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means includes
In the effect display, the additional information moved from the identification information display area is not displayed in the identification information display area, while the additional information not moved from the identification information display area is identified. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display can be performed integrally with corresponding identification information in an information display area.
The subordinate concept (6-3) of the inventive concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means includes
When the effect is displayed, the identification information display area is arranged at a corner of the screen, and the additional information is displayed in a remaining area in the screen that has a larger area than the identification information display area. A gaming machine characterized by

(Invention concept (7))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b), etc., it is possible to notify or suggest a time change or period end by displaying a background with a change indicating the passage of time. That is, the control means (production control device 300) scrolls the first parameter (the road and surrounding scenery) indicating the passage of time on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41), for example, during a special figure variable display game. The image can be displayed with a background that includes a second parameter (an image that changes from morning to night), and the passage of time can be expressed by displaying the background. In addition, for example, the end of the predetermined period (for example, the period of reach occurrence notification effect) can be notified or suggested by changing the second parameter in conjunction with the end of the predetermined period in the variable display game. For this reason, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, instead of simply expressing the passage of time or the end of the period with one type of parameter (changing image), the passage of time is represented with two types of parameters, and the end of the period with one of these parameters. As a result, a complex, interesting and dynamic production becomes possible.

The inventive concept (7) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
The display area (screen) of the display means can display a changing background including a first parameter and a second parameter indicating the passage of time, and the second parameter is changed in conjunction with the end of a predetermined period of the production. By making it possible, it is possible to notify or suggest the end of the predetermined period.
The background with the change may be displayed during the variable display game, or may be displayed during a period when the variable display game is not in progress. Examples of the period during which the variable display game is not in progress include, for example, a state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result (for example, a big hit state), a state before the start of the variable display game (so-called customer Waiting state). The background with the change is not limited to the one displayed on the background display layer.

(Invention concept (8))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 165 (a), 165 (b), etc., the occurrence of a reach or a big hit depending on the presence / absence of the form (pose etc.) when the characters are displayed together. It is possible to make a reliability suggestion (notice). Thereby, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (8) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes
During the variable display game, it is possible to execute an effect display that displays a plurality of pieces of effect information that is not the identification information at a plurality of locations in a display area (screen) of the display means. A gaming machine having a configuration capable of suggesting a mode of the variation display game that proceeds subsequently or a result of the variation display game to be determined thereafter, depending on presence or absence or mode of form.
The production information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be this additional information.
In addition, the “suggestable configuration” means a configuration capable of so-called advance notice. For example, the probability of occurrence of each of the various aspects of the variable display game that may be selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter ( (Specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the setting of the type of the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is performed before the lottery. It is the structure set as different according to the presence or absence or aspect of the difference in the form of information. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, for example, the aspect of the variable display game that is likely to proceed afterward from the presence or absence or aspect of the form of the production information, and the interest of the game is enhanced. . The “suggestable configuration” for the result of the variable display game to be determined thereafter is also the same, for example, a table used for lottery for determining the presence or absence or aspect of the form of the effect information (for example, the notice distribution) The table is set to a table with different contents according to the determined result of the variable display game (for example, when there is a big hit, the probability that the difference in the form of the effect information is selected) When a relatively high table is used, and a deviation occurs, a table with a relatively high probability of selecting no difference in the form of the production information is used, and for example, there is a difference in the form of the production information. The configuration can suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit by performing the performance). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined later, based on the presence or absence of the difference in the form of the production information, and the interest of the game is enhanced. .

(Invention concept (9))
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 163 (c) and 165 (c), different display information (for example, a character such as tiger lock C8) from the identification information (design of the decorative special figure) is displayed in a predetermined display mode. When displayed in (display color, display size, display position, pose, whether or not it has a predetermined item, etc.), it is linked to the display of this display mode (light emission state) , The operating state, the operating position, etc.) can be changed, and it is also possible to make a suggestion of reliability (notice) such as the occurrence of a reach or a big hit. Thereby, a novel and dynamic production becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (9) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
Apart from the display means, it has an accessory that can change the mode (light emitting state, operating state, operating position, etc.),
The control means includes
The effect display which displays the effect information which is not the identification information in the display area (screen) of the display means can be executed, and the mode of the accessory is changed in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information in the effect display. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of
The production information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be this additional information.

Next, modifications of each invention of the present application will be described.
First, the effect display in the invention concepts (1) and (2) (the effect display in which the identification information image and the effect information image of the variable display game overlap at least partially) is not limited to the reach start effect, For example, it may be performed as an effect before the start of reach (the first half of the decoration special drawing), an effect executed as an effect during the reach action after the start of reach, or during a customer waiting display in a wait state It may be a directing.

In addition, the effect display (notification effect by the combination of effect information different from the identification information) in the invention concept (3) is not limited to the presence or absence of reach action, and the branch destination (transition destination) of the subsequent effect flow or game flow is notified. Or it may be suggested. For example, the effect display may be performed as part of the reach action, and may function as a notice effect indicating the development destination of the subsequent reach effect.
In addition, the effect information displayed in the effect display in the inventive concepts (3) and (8) is not two (two places) but three or more (three or more places), and the effects displayed at these three or more places. A mode in which the presence or absence of reach action is notified or suggested by a combination of information or a difference in form may be used. For example, the effect information may be displayed in the left, right, and middle three columns, respectively, as in the design of a decorative special figure.
In addition, the display of the effect information in the effect display in the inventive concepts (3) and (8) may include a variable display in which the type of the displayed effect information varies, or an aspect not including this variable display (for example, A mode in which the display is stopped without changing the type of the production information that has been displayed may be possible.

Next, the scope of application of the invention described in this application will be described.
(1) The gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment, and can be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine even when a game ball is used to play a game.
(2) In addition, the present invention is not limited to gaming machines using game balls, but also applies to so-called pachislot machines (rotating slot machine gaming machines) that use coins (or medals) to play games. Can do.
(3) A display device such as a display device for a decorative figure is not limited to a display device using a liquid crystal display. Any member can be used as long as the content can be changed.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Front frame (main frame, game frame)
5 Glass frame (front frame)
9 Production buttons (operating means)
9a Touch panel (operating means)
11 Launch operation handle (control unit)
11a Touch switch (contact detection means)
12a Upper speaker (directing means)
12b Lower speaker (direction means)
14 Logo display section 16 Ball rental button 20 Game board 26 Ordinary variable winning device (ordinary electric equipment: Fuden)
26a Start prize opening (second start opening, start area)
26b Opening / closing member (opening / closing door, starting port opening / closing means, starting area opening / closing means)
27 Variable prize-winning device
27a Big prize opening 27b Opening and closing member (opening and closing door)
32 Universal map starting gate 35 Collective display device (display means, special figure display means, universal figure display means)
41 Display device (production means, display means, special figure display means, universal figure display means)
41a Display section (display screen, display area)
42 Panel decoration device (direction means)
43 Frame decoration device (directing means)
44 board production device (production means)
55 External information terminal board 100 Game control device (control device, control means)
101 gaming microcomputer 101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 First start switch (Start 1 switch)
121 Second start port switch (Start port 2 switch)
122 Gate Switch 123 Winning Port Switch 124 Large Winning Port Switch 126 Magnetic Sensor 127 Panel Radio Sensor 200 Discharge Control Device 211 Glass Frame (Front Frame) Opening Detection Switch 212 Front Frame (Main Body Frame) Opening Detection Switch 300 Production Control Device (Control Device) , Control means)
311 CPU
311a RAM
312 VDP
321 PROM
322 Image ROM
326 RAM
327 FeRAM (backup memory)
338 Volume SW
339 Setting confirmation LED
500 power supply device 600 start port sorting device 607 special figure 1 start port (first start port, start area)
608 Special figure 2 start port (second start port, start area)
700 Movable character 701 Decoration part 801 Upper movable character (movable character, illuminable character)
802 Left movable object (movable object)
803 Right hand movable accessory (movable accessory)
H1 Fluctuation display area (identification information display area)

Claims (1)

A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and a control means for controlling the display means. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous for the player. In gaming machines that can generate
Apart from the display means, it has an accessory that can change the aspect,
The control means includes
An effect display that displays the effect information that is not the identification information in the display area of the display means can be executed, and a function of changing the mode of the accessory in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information in the effect display. A gaming machine characterized by having.

Images